快乐巴利palinanda.cc

清净道论·随念业处的解说 Anussatikammaṭṭhānaniddeso

本经目录八、随念业处的解说死随念论身至念论部分差别论入出息念论二百二十三、寂止随念论如是,在为令善人愉悦而造的《清净道论》中,于定的修习之部,名为〈随念业处的解说〉的第八章[终]。

已对照

八、随念业处的解说

8. Anussatikammaṭṭhānaniddeso
已对照

死随念论

Maraṇassatikathā
167缅 1.222已对照

一百六十七、如今,紧接在此之后的死随念(maraṇassati)的修习解说已到来。此中,「死(maraṇaṃ)」者:即属于一有的命根(jīvitindriya)之断绝。而凡是诸阿罗汉被称为轮转之苦的断绝的断绝之死(samucchedamaraṇa),诸行被称为刹那坏灭的刹那之死(khaṇikamaraṇa),以及在「树死了」「金属死了」等[说法]中的世俗之死(sammutimaraṇa),那[些]在此都不是所意指的。

167. Idāni ito anantarāya maraṇassatiyā bhāvanāniddeso anuppatto. Tattha maraṇanti ekabhavapariyāpannassa jīvitindriyassa upacchedo. Yaṃ panetaṃ arahantānaṃ vaṭṭadukkhasamucchedasaṅkhātaṃ samucchedamaraṇaṃ, saṅkhārānaṃ khaṇabhaṅgasaṅkhātaṃ khaṇikamaraṇaṃ, rukkho mato lohaṃ matantiādīsu sammutimaraṇañca, na taṃ idha adhippetaṃ.
已对照

而这所意指的[死],有时死(kālamaraṇa)与非时死(akālamaraṇa)两种。此中,时死是由于福尽、或由于寿尽、或由于二者俱尽而有。非时死是依断业(kammupacchedakakamma)之力而有。

Yampi cetaṃ adhippetaṃ, taṃ kālamaraṇaṃ akālamaraṇanti duvidhaṃ hoti. Tattha kālamaraṇaṃ puññakkhayena vā āyukkhayena vā ubhayakkhayena vā hoti. Akālamaraṇaṃ kammupacchedakakammavasena.
已对照

此中,即使令寿命相续生起的诸缘仍然具足,仅仅由于令生结生之业的异熟已经成熟而有的死,这名为由福尽而死。由于缺乏趣、时、食物等的具足,犹如现今时代的人们那样,依约一百岁之量的寿命已尽而有的死,这名为由寿尽而死。而犹如杜西魔(Dūsī māra)、迦蓝浮王(Kalābu)等那样,相续被那能当下就使[他们]从[所处之]位坠落的业所截断者的死,或者依前业之力,相续正被持刀[杀害]等加害所截断者的死,这名为非时死。这一切都摄在前述的命根之断绝中。如是,对被称为命根之断绝的死的忆念,[即]死随念。

Tattha yaṃ vijjamānāyapi āyusantānajanakapaccayasampattiyā kevalaṃ paṭisandhijanakassa kammassa vipakkavipākattā maraṇaṃ hoti, idaṃ puññakkhayena maraṇaṃ nāma. Yaṃ gatikālāhārādisampattiyā abhāvena ajjatanakālapurisānaṃ viya vassasatamattaparimāṇassa āyuno khayavasena maraṇaṃ hoti, idaṃ āyukkhayena maraṇaṃ nāma. Yaṃ pana dūsīmārakalāburājādīnaṃ viya taṅkhaṇaññeva ṭhānācāvanasamatthena kammunā upacchinnasantānānaṃ, purimakammavasena vā satthaharaṇādīhi upakkamehi upacchijjamānasantānānaṃ maraṇaṃ hoti, idaṃ akālamaraṇaṃ nāma. Taṃ sabbampi vuttappakārena jīvitindriyupacchedena saṅgahitaṃ. Iti jīvitindriyupacchedasaṅkhātassa maraṇassa saraṇaṃ maraṇassati.
168缅 1.223已对照

一百六十八、欲修习它者,应独处、宴默,以「死将会到来,命根将会断绝」,或以「死、死」[这样]转起如理作意。因为对不如理地转起[作意]者,在随念可爱之人的死时生起愁,犹如生母随念爱子之死时那样;在随念不可爱之人的死时生起愉悦,犹如怨敌们随念[其]怨敌之死时那样;在随念中立之人的死时不生起悚惧,犹如焚尸人见到尸体时那样;在随念自己的死时生起惊恐,犹如生性胆怯的人见到举刀的杀戮者时那样。这一切都是由于缺乏念、悚惧与智而有。所以,应在各处看见被杀、已死的众生,转向那些曾见过[其]成就的众生已死之死,结合念、悚惧与智,以「死将会到来」等方式转起作意。因为如是转起者,是如理地转起——以方便转起,此是其义。因为唯有如是转起者,对某些人而言,诸盖便被镇伏,以死为所缘的念便安住,业处便达到近行。

168. Taṃ bhāvetukāmena rahogatena paṭisallīnena ‘‘maraṇaṃ bhavissati, jīvitindriyaṃ upacchijjissatī’’ti vā, ‘‘maraṇaṃ maraṇa’’nti vā yoniso manasikāro pavattetabbo. Ayoniso pavattayato hi iṭṭhajanamaraṇānussaraṇe soko uppajjati vijātamātuyā piyaputtamaraṇānussaraṇe viya. Aniṭṭhajanamaraṇānussaraṇe pāmojjaṃ uppajjati verīnaṃ verimaraṇānussaraṇe viya. Majjhattajanamaraṇānussaraṇe saṃvego na uppajjati matakaḷevaradassane chavaḍāhakassa viya. Attano maraṇānussaraṇe santāso uppajjati ukkhittāsikaṃ vadhakaṃ disvā bhīrukajātikassa viya. Tadetaṃ sabbampi satisaṃvegañāṇavirahato hoti. Tasmā tattha tattha hatamatasatte oloketvā diṭṭhapubbasampattīnaṃ sattānaṃ matānaṃ maraṇaṃ āvajjetvā satiñca saṃvegañca ñāṇañca yojetvā ‘‘maraṇaṃ bhavissatī’’tiādinā nayena manasikāro pavattetabbo. Evaṃ pavattento hi yoniso pavatteti, upāyena pavattetīti attho. Evaṃ pavattayatoyeva hi ekaccassa nīvaraṇāni vikkhambhanti, maraṇārammaṇā sati saṇṭhāti, upacārappattameva kammaṭṭhānaṃ hoti.
169已对照

一百六十九、而凡仅此还不能[达到]者,应以这八种行相随念死:依如杀戮者现前,依成就与失坏,依比照,依身为众多所共,依寿命羸弱,依无定相,依时分的限定,依刹那短促。

169. Yassa pana ettāvatā na hoti, tena vadhakapaccupaṭṭhānato, sampattivipattito, upasaṃharaṇato, kāyabahusādhāraṇato, āyudubbalato, animittato, addhānaparicchedato, khaṇaparittatoti imehi aṭṭhahākārehi maraṇaṃ anussaritabbaṃ.
已对照

此中,「依如杀戮者现前(vadhakapaccupaṭṭhānato)」者:即依犹如杀戮者那样的现前。因为犹如杀戮者[心想]「我要砍下这人的头」,拿起刀,在[他的]颈上挥动,就已现前;同样,死也已现前——应如是随念。为什么呢?由于与生俱来,又由于夺取生命。因为犹如菌蕈的芽苞顶着泥土而长出,同样,众生带着老死而生。因为他们的结生心在生起之后紧接着就达到老,与相应诸蕴一起破坏,犹如从山顶坠落的岩石[碎裂]那样。如是,首先刹那之死是与生俱来的。而由于已生者必定会死,此处所意指的死也是与生俱来的。所以,这众生从出生之时起,犹如升起的太阳只是朝着没落而行,从已走过之处丝毫不退回;又犹如从山中流下、流速湍急、冲走一切的河流,只是流淌、只是奔流,丝毫不退回;同样,[这众生]丝毫不退回,只是朝着死而行。因此说——

Tattha vadhakapaccupaṭṭhānatoti vadhakassa viya paccupaṭṭhānato. Yathā hi imassa sīsaṃ chindissāmīti asiṃ gahetvā gīvāya cārayamāno vadhako paccupaṭṭhitova hoti, evaṃ maraṇampi paccupaṭṭhitamevāti anussaritabbaṃ. Kasmā? Saha jātiyā āgatato, jīvitaharaṇato ca. Yathā hi ahicchattakamakuḷaṃ matthakena paṃsuṃ gahetvāva uggacchati, evaṃ sattā jarāmaraṇaṃ gahetvāva nibbattanti. Tathā hi nesaṃ paṭisandhicittaṃ uppādānantarameva jaraṃ patvā pabbatasikharato patitasilā viya bhijjati saddhiṃ sampayuttakhandhehi. Evaṃ khaṇikamaraṇaṃ tāva saha jātiyā āgataṃ. Jātassa pana avassaṃ maraṇato idhādhippetamaraṇampi saha jātiyā āgataṃ. Tasmā esa satto jātakālato paṭṭhāya yathā nāma uṭṭhito sūriyo atthābhimukho gacchateva, gatagataṭṭhānato īsakampi na nivattati. Yathā vā nadī pabbateyyā sīghasotā hārahārinī sandateva vattateva īsakampi na nivattati, evaṃ īsakampi anivattamāno maraṇābhimukhova yāti. Tena vuttaṃ –
已对照

「人于最初的一夜,便住于胎中,

‘‘Yamekarattiṃ paṭhamaṃ, gabbhe vasati māṇavo;
已对照

他既已起程而行,行去便不再回返。」(《本生》1.15.363)

Abbhuṭṭhitova so yāti, sa gacchaṃ na nivattatī’’ti. (jā. 1.15.363);
缅 1.224已对照

而对如是行进的他来说,死正是临近的,犹如被夏日炙烤的小河的干涸,犹如清晨果柄被汁液浸润的树果的坠落,犹如被槌击打的陶器的破碎,犹如被日光照触的露珠的消散。所以说——

Evaṃ gacchato cassa gimhābhitattānaṃ kunnadīnaṃ khayo viya, pāto āporasānugatabandhanānaṃ dumapphalānaṃ patanaṃ viya, muggarābhitāḷitānaṃ mattikabhājanānaṃ bhedo viya, sūriyarasmisamphuṭṭhānaṃ ussāvabindūnaṃ viddhaṃsanaṃ viya ca maraṇameva āsannaṃ hoti. Tenāha –
已对照

「昼夜在流逝,命在止息;

‘‘Accayanti ahorattā, jīvitamuparujjhati;
已对照

有死者的寿命耗尽,如小河之水。(《相应部》1.146)

Āyu khīyati maccānaṃ, kunnadīnaṃva odakaṃ. (saṃ. ni. 1.146);
已对照

「犹如成熟的诸果,清晨就有坠落的怖畏;

‘‘Phalānamiva pakkānaṃ, pāto papatato bhayaṃ;
已对照

如是已生的有死者,恒常有死亡的怖畏。

Evaṃ jātāna maccānaṃ, niccaṃ maraṇato bhayaṃ.
已对照

「犹如陶师所造的陶器,

‘‘Yathāpi kumbhakārassa, kataṃ mattikabhājanaṃ;
已对照

小的与大的,已烧成的与未烧的,

Khuddakañca mahantañca, yaṃ pakkaṃ yañca āmakaṃ;
已对照

一切都以破碎为终结;有死者的生命也是如此。」(《经集》581-582)

Sabbaṃ bhedanapariyantaṃ, evaṃ maccāna jīvitaṃ’. (su. ni. 581-582);
已对照

「犹如草尖上的露珠,一到日出[便消失];

‘‘Ussāvova tiṇaggamhi, sūriyuggamanaṃ pati;
已对照

人们的寿命也是如此——母亲,请不要阻拦我。」(《本生》1.11.79)

Evamāyu manussānaṃ, mā maṃ amma nivārayā’’ti. (jā. 1.11.79);
已对照

如是,这犹如举刀的杀戮者那样与生俱来的死,犹如那在颈上挥动刀的杀戮者那样,必定夺取生命,不夺取就不退回。所以,由于与生俱来,又由于夺取生命,死也犹如举刀的杀戮者那样已现前——应如是依如杀戮者现前而随念死。

Evaṃ ukkhittāsiko vadhako viya saha jātiyā āgataṃ panetaṃ maraṇaṃ gīvāya asiṃ cārayamāno so vadhako viya jīvitaṃ haratiyeva, na aharitvā nivattati. Tasmā saha jātiyā āgatato, jīvitaharaṇato ca ukkhittāsiko vadhako viya maraṇampi paccupaṭṭhitamevāti evaṃ vadhakapaccupaṭṭhānato maraṇaṃ anussaritabbaṃ.
170已对照

一百七十、「依成就与失坏(sampattivipattito)」者:在此[世间],所谓成就,只在失坏尚未压倒它时才光彩;而没有任何所谓成就能越过失坏而住立。正是如此——

170. Sampattivipattitoti idha sampatti nāma tāvadeva sobhati, yāva naṃ vipatti nābhibhavati, na ca sā sampatti nāma atthi, yā vipattiṃ atikkamma tiṭṭheyya. Tathā hi –
已对照

「享有了整个大地,施与了百俱胝,曾经安乐的[那位王],

‘‘Sakalaṃ mediniṃ bhutvā, datvā koṭisataṃ sukhī;
已对照

到最后,他所自在的只剩下半个余甘子。

Aḍḍhāmalakamattassa, ante issarataṃ gato.
已对照

「就以那同一个身躯,当福德已趋于尽时,

‘‘Teneva dehabandhena, puññamhi khayamāgate;
已对照

面向死亡,那位阿育(Asoka)[大王]也陷入了忧(soka)。」

Maraṇābhimukho sopi, asoko sokamāgato’’ti.
缅 1.225已对照

再者,一切健康都以病为终结,一切青春都以老为终结,一切生命都以死为终结;一切世间群居之众都被生所随逐,被老所侵入,被病所压倒,被死所击打。所以[世尊]说——

Apica sabbaṃ ārogyaṃ byādhipariyosānaṃ, sabbaṃ yobbanaṃ jarāpariyosānaṃ, sabbaṃ jīvitaṃ maraṇapariyosānaṃ, sabboyeva lokasannivāso jātiyā anugato, jarāya anusaṭo, byādhinā abhibhūto, maraṇena abbhāhato. Tenāha –
已对照

「犹如广大的岩石之山,触及天空,

‘‘Yathāpi selā vipulā, nabhaṃ āhacca pabbatā;
已对照

从四周合围而来,碾压着四方。

Samantā anupariyeyyuṃ, nippothentā catuddisā.
已对照

「同样,衰老与死压向诸生类——

‘‘Evaṃ jarā ca maccu ca, adhivattanti pāṇine;
已对照

刹帝利、婆罗门、吠舍,首陀罗、旃陀罗、补羯娑;

Khattiye brāhmaṇe vesse, sudde caṇḍālapukkuse;
已对照

无所放过,一切尽皆碾碎。

Na kiñci parivajjeti, sabbamevābhimaddati.
已对照

「在那里,象没有[用武之]地,车与步兵也没有;

‘‘Na tattha hatthīnaṃ bhūmi, na rathānaṃ na pattiyā;
已对照

也不能以咒术之战,或以财而战胜。」(《相应部》1.136)

Na cāpi mantayuddhena, sakkā jetuṃ dhanena vā’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.136);
已对照

应如是辨定生命的成就以死的失坏为终结,依成就与失坏而随念死。

Evaṃ jīvitasampattiyā maraṇavipattipariyosānataṃ vavatthapentena sampattivipattito maraṇaṃ anussaritabbaṃ.
171缅 1.226已对照

一百七十一、「依比照(upasaṃharaṇato)」者:即依把自己与他人相比照。此中,应以七种行相依比照而随念死:依名声之广大,依福德之广大,依势力之广大,依神通之广大,依慧之广大,依独觉佛,依正等正觉者。怎样[比照]呢?这名为死的,就连对名声广大、随从众多、财富与车乘具足的大三摩多(Mahāsammata)、曼达多王(Mandhātu)、大善见王(Mahāsudassana)、坚固念王(Daḷhanemi)、尼弥王(Nimi)等,也毫无顾忌地落到了[他们]上面;何况我,它怎会不落到我上面呢?

名声广大的诸位胜王,大三摩多等,

他们也落入了死神的掌控,像我这样的人还用说吗?

应如是首先依名声之广大而随念。

怎样依福德之广大[而随念]呢?

树提(Jotika)、阇提罗(Jaṭila)、郁伽(Ugga),美达迦(Meṇḍaka),还有富楼那迦(Puṇṇaka);

这些以及其他在世间以大福德者闻名的人,

全都趣入了死,像我这样的人还用说吗?

应如是依福德之广大而随念。

怎样依势力之广大[而随念]呢?

婆薮提婆(Vāsudeva)、婆罗提婆(Baladeva),毗摩舍那(Bhīmasena)、瑜底提罗(Yudhiṭṭhila),

以及那位大力士遮努罗(Cānura),都落入了终结者的掌控。

他们是如此具足体力与势力,如是在世间闻名;

他们也走向了死,像我这样的人还用说吗?

应如是依势力之广大而随念。

怎样依神通之广大[而随念]呢?

他仅以脚拇指,就震动了最胜殿(Vejayanta);

他是有神通者之中最胜的,是第二位上首弟子。

就连他,也犹如鹿[进入]狮子之口那样,

连同[他的]诸神通,进入了可怖的死神之口,像我这样的人还用说吗?

应如是依神通之广大而随念。

怎样依慧之广大[而随念]呢?

除了世间怙主之外,其余凡有的诸生类,

在慧上都抵不上舍利弗的十六分之一。

这样一位大慧者、第一位上首弟子,

也落入了死的掌控,像我这样的人还用说吗?

应如是依慧之广大而随念。

怎样依独觉佛而[随念]呢?就连那些凭着自己智与精进之力摧毁了一切烦恼之敌、证得独觉菩提、犹如犀角般的自生者(sayambhū),他们也未脱离死;我又怎能脱离呢?

依凭种种[事]相,审察[诸法]的诸大仙,

以自生智的威力,证得了诸漏的灭尽;

他们依独行独住,犹如犀角,

他们也未能超越死神,像我这样的人还用说吗?

应如是依独觉佛而随念。

怎样依正等正觉者而[随念]呢?就连那位世尊——[他]色身以八十随好所庄严的三十二大丈夫相而绚烂,法身以一切行相清净的戒蕴等功德之宝而丰盛,于名声之广大、福德之广大、势力之广大、神通之广大、慧之广大[五者]都已到达彼岸,是无等者、无等等者、无可比拟者、阿罗汉、正等正觉者——他也犹如大火聚被降落的雨水[熄灭]那样,被降落的死之雨当下就熄灭了。

对于有如此大威力的大仙,

这死也不因畏惧、不因羞愧而顺服于[他];

这无羞耻、无怯懦、践踏一切众生的[死],

对像我这样的众生,怎会不征服呢?

应如是依正等正觉者而随念。

当他如是由于同样有死,把自己与那些具足名声之广大等的他人相比照,[想]「我也会像那些殊胜的众生一样死去」而随念时,业处便达到近行。应如是依比照而随念死。

171. Upasaṃharaṇatoti parehi saddhiṃ attano upasaṃharaṇato. Tattha sattahākārehi upasaṃharaṇato maraṇaṃ anussaritabbaṃ, yasamahattato, puññamahattato, thāmamahattato, iddhimahattato, paññāmahattato, paccekabuddhato, sammāsambuddhatoti. Kathaṃ? Idaṃ maraṇaṃ nāma mahāyasānaṃ mahāparivārānaṃ sampannadhanavāhanānaṃ mahāsammatamandhātumahāsudassana daḷhanemi nimippabhutīnampi upari nirāsaṅkameva patitaṃ, kimaṅgaṃ pana mayhaṃ upari na patissati?
Mahāyasā rājavarā, mahāsammataādayo;
Tepi maccuvasaṃ pattā, mādisesu kathāva kāti.
Evaṃ tāva yasamahattato anussaritabbaṃ.
Kathaṃ puññamahattato?
Jotiko jaṭilo uggo, meṇḍako atha puṇṇako;
Ete caññe ca ye loke, mahāpuññāti vissutā;
Sabbe maraṇamāpannā, mādisesu kathāva kāti.
Evaṃ puññamahattato anussaritabbaṃ.
Kathaṃ thāmamahattato?
Vāsudevo baladevo, bhīmaseno yudhiṭṭhilo;
Cānuro yo mahāmallo, antakassa vasaṃ gatā.
Evaṃ thāmabalūpetā, iti lokamhi vissutā;
Etepi maraṇaṃ yātā, mādisesu kathāva kāti.
Evaṃ thāmamahattato anussaritabbaṃ.
Kathaṃ iddhimahattato?
Pādaṅguṭṭhakamattena, vejayantamakampayi;
Yo nāmiddhimataṃ seṭṭho, dutiyo aggasāvako.
Sopi maccumukhaṃ ghoraṃ, migo sīhamukhaṃ viya;
Paviṭṭho saha iddhīhi, mādisesu kathāva kāti.
Evaṃ iddhimahattato anussaritabbaṃ.
Kathaṃ paññāmahattato?
Lokanāthaṃ ṭhapetvāna, ye caññe atthi pāṇino;
Paññāya sāriputtassa, kalaṃ nāgghanti soḷasiṃ.
Evaṃ nāma mahāpañño, paṭhamo aggasāvako;
Maraṇassa vasaṃ patto, mādisesu kathāva kāti.
Evaṃ paññāmahattato anussaritabbaṃ.
Kathaṃ paccekabuddhato? Yepi te attano ñāṇavīriyabalena sabbakilesasattunimmathanaṃ katvā paccekabodhiṃ pattā khaggavisāṇakappā sayambhuno, tepi maraṇato na muttā, kuto panāhaṃ muccissāmīti.
Taṃ taṃ nimittamāgamma, vīmaṃsantā mahesayo;
Sayambhuññāṇatejena, ye pattā āsavakkhayaṃ.
Ekacariyanivāsena, khaggasiṅgasamūpamā;
Tepi nātigatā maccuṃ, mādisesu kathāva kāti.
Evaṃ paccekabuddhato anussaritabbaṃ.
Kathaṃ sammāsambuddhato? Yopi so bhagavā asītianubyañjanapaṭimaṇḍitadvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇavicitrarūpakāyo sabbākāraparisuddhasīlakkhandhādiguṇaratanasamiddhadhammakāyo yasamahattapuññamahattathāmamahattaiddhimahattapaññāmahattānaṃ pāraṃ gato asamo asamasamo appaṭipuggalo arahaṃ sammāsambuddho, sopi salilavuṭṭhinipātena mahāaggikkhandho viya maraṇavuṭṭhinipātena ṭhānaso vūpasanto.
Evaṃ mahānubhāvassa, yaṃ nāmetaṃ mahesino;
Na bhayena na lajjāya, maraṇaṃ vasamāgataṃ.
Nillajjaṃ vītasārajjaṃ, sabbasattābhimaddanaṃ;
Tayidaṃ mādisaṃ sattaṃ, kathaṃ nābhibhavissatīti.
Evaṃ sammāsambuddhato anussaritabbaṃ.
Tassevaṃ yasamahattatādisampannehi parehi saddhiṃ maraṇasāmaññatāya attānaṃ upasaṃharitvā tesaṃ viya sattavisesānaṃ mayhampi maraṇaṃ bhavissatīti anussarato upacārappattaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ hotīti. Evaṃ upasaṃharaṇato maraṇaṃ anussaritabbaṃ.
172已对照

一百七十二、「依身为众多所共(kāyabahusādhāraṇato)」者:这身是为众多所共的。首先,它为八十种虫类所共有:此中,依附于表皮的生类啃食表皮,依附于皮的啃食皮,依附于肉的啃食肉,依附于腱的啃食腱,依附于骨的啃食骨,依附于骨髓的啃食骨髓。它们就在那里出生、衰老、死去,排泄大小便。身体就是它们的产房、病房、坟场、厕所与尿槽。这身也会由于那些虫类的扰动而趋向死亡。而犹如为八十种虫类所共有,同样,它也为内在的数百种病,以及外在的蛇、蝎等死亡之缘所共有。

172. Kāyabahusādhāraṇatoti ayaṃ kāyo bahusādhāraṇo. Asītiyā tāva kimikulānaṃ sādhāraṇo, tattha chavinissitā pāṇā chaviṃ khādanti, cammanissitā cammaṃ khādanti, maṃsanissitā maṃsaṃ khādanti, nhārunissitā nhāruṃ khādanti, aṭṭhinissitā aṭṭhiṃ khādanti, miñjanissitā miñjaṃ khādanti. Tattheva jāyanti jīyanti mīyanti, uccārapassāvaṃ karonti. Kāyova nesaṃ sūtigharañceva gilānasālā ca susānañca vaccakuṭi ca passāvadoṇikā ca. Svāyaṃ tesampi kimikulānaṃ pakopena maraṇaṃ nigacchatiyeva. Yathā ca asītiyā kimikulānaṃ, evaṃ ajjhattikānaṃyeva anekasatānaṃ rogānaṃ bāhirānañca ahivicchikādīnaṃ maraṇassa paccayānaṃ sādhāraṇo.
缅 1.228已对照

因为犹如在四衢大道上竖立的靶子,从一切方向来的箭、枪、矛、石块等都落在[它上面];同样,一切祸患也都落在身上。这身也会由于那些祸患的降落而趋向死亡。所以世尊说:「诸比丘,在此,比丘在白天已过、夜晚来临时,这样省察:『我的死缘确实很多:或蛇咬我,或蝎螫我,或蜈蚣咬我,我便会因此命终,那对我就是障碍;或我会绊倒跌下,或我吃下的饭会[在体内]败坏,或我的胆汁会扰动,或我的痰会扰动,或我那如刀割的诸风会扰动,我便会因此命终,那对我就是障碍。』」(《增支部》6.20)应如是依身为众多所共而随念死。

Yathā hi catumahāpathe ṭhapite lakkhamhi sabbadisāhi āgatā sarasattitomarapāsāṇādayo nipatanti, evaṃ kāyepi sabbupaddavā nipatanti. Svāyaṃ tesampi upaddavānaṃ nipātena maraṇaṃ nigacchatiyeva. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu divase nikkhante rattiyā paṭihitāya iti paṭisañcikkhati, bahukā kho me paccayā maraṇassa, ahi vā maṃ ḍaṃseyya, vicchiko vā maṃ ḍaṃseyya, satapadī vā maṃ ḍaṃseyya, tena me assa kālaṅkiriyā, so mamassa antarāyo, upakkhalitvā vā papateyyaṃ, bhattaṃ vā me bhuttaṃ byāpajjeyya, pittaṃ vā me kuppeyya, semhaṃ vā me kuppeyya, satthakā vā me vātā kuppeyyuṃ, tena me assa kālaṅkiriyā, so mamassa antarāyo’’ti. Evaṃ (a. ni. 6.20) kāyabahusādhāraṇato maraṇaṃ anussaritabbaṃ.
173已对照

一百七十三、「依寿命羸弱(āyudubbalato)」者:这所谓寿命是无力的、羸弱的。正是如此,众生的生命系于入出息,系于威仪,系于冷热,系于大种,也系于食。它唯有得到入出息的均等运行才转起;而当向外呼出的鼻风不进入内里,或进入的不呼出时,便名为已死。它也唯有得到四威仪的均等运行才转起;而由于其中任一种的过度,诸寿行便被截断。它也唯有得到冷热的均等运行才转起;而被极冷或极热所压倒者,[生命]便败坏。它也唯有得到诸大种的均等运行才转起;而由于地界或水界等其中任一种的扰动,即使是具足力量的人,也会身体僵硬,或由于腹泻等而身体湿烂腐臭,或被大热所缠,或关节的连结碎裂,[于是]达到生命之尽。生命也唯有对在适当时候得到段食者才转起;而对得不到食物者,便趋于遍尽。应如是依寿命羸弱而随念死。

173. Āyudubbalatoti āyu nāmetaṃ abalaṃ dubbalaṃ. Tathā hi sattānaṃ jīvitaṃ assāsapassāsūpanibaddhañceva iriyāpathūpanibaddhañca sītuṇhūpanibaddhañca mahābhūtūpanibaddhañca āhārūpanibaddhañca. Tadetaṃ assāsapassāsānaṃ samavuttitaṃ labhamānameva pavattati. Bahi nikkhantanāsikavāte pana anto apavisante, paviṭṭhe vā anikkhamante mato nāma hoti. Catunnaṃ iriyāpathānampi samavuttitaṃ labhamānameva pavattati. Aññataraññatarassa pana adhimattatāya āyusaṅkhārā upacchijjanti. Sītuṇhānampi samavuttitaṃ labhamānameva pavattati. Atisītena pana atiuṇhena vā abhibhūtassa vipajjati. Mahābhūtānampi samavuttitaṃ labhamānameva pavattati. Pathavīdhātuyā pana āpodhātuādīnaṃ vā aññataraññatarassa pakopena balasampannopi puggalo patthaddhakāyo vā atisārādivasena kilinnapūtikāyo vā mahāḍāhapareto vā sambhijjamānasandhibandhano vā hutvā jīvitakkhayaṃ pāpuṇāti. Kabaḷīkārāhārampi yuttakāle labhantasseva jīvitaṃ pavattati, āhāraṃ alabhamānassa pana parikkhayaṃ gacchatīti. Evaṃ āyudubbalato maraṇaṃ anussaritabbaṃ.
174已对照

一百七十四、「依无定相(animittato)」者:依无确定,依无限定——此是其义。因为众生的——

174. Animittatoti avavatthānato, paricchedābhāvatoti attho. Sattānaṃ hi –
已对照

生命、病与时,舍身之处与去处;

Jīvitaṃ byādhi kālo ca, dehanikkhepanaṃ gati;
已对照

这五者在生命世间是无定相的,不可得知。

Pañcete jīvalokasmiṃ, animittā na nāyare.
缅 1.229已对照

此中,首先生命,由于不能确定「只应活这么久,不超过这个」,故是无定相的。因为众生在凝滑时也会死,在胞结、闭尸、坚厚、一个月、两个月、三个月、四个月、五个月、十个月时也会死,在出胎之时也会死;此后,在百岁之内或之外,都一样会死。病,由于不能确定「众生只会因这种病而死,不会因别的」,故也是无定相的。因为众生会因眼病而死,也会因耳病等其中任何一种而死。时,由于不能如是确定「只应在这个时候死,不在别的时候」,故也是无定相的。因为众生会在上午死,也会在中午等其中任何一个时候死。舍身之处,由于不能如是确定「死者的身体只应倒在这里,不在别处」,故也是无定相的。因为生在村内的人,自体也会倒在村外;生在村外的人,也会倒在村内。同样,陆生者[会倒]在水中,水生者[会倒]在陆上——应如是以多种方式详说。去处,由于不能如是确定「从这里死去者应投生于这里」,故也是无定相的。因为从天界死去的,也会投生于人间;从人界死去的,也会投生于天界等任何一处——如是世间犹如套在机关上的牛那样,在五趣中轮转——应如是依无定相而随念死。

Tattha jīvitaṃ tāva ‘‘ettakameva jīvitabbaṃ, na ito para’’nti vavatthānābhāvato animittaṃ. Kalalakālepi hi sattā maranti, abbudapesighanamāsikadvemāsatemāsacatumāsapañcamāsadasamāsakālepi. Kucchito nikkhantasamayepi. Tato paraṃ vassasatassa antopi bahipi marantiyeva. Byādhipi ‘‘imināva byādhinā sattā maranti, nāññenā’’ti vavatthānābhāvato animitto. Cakkhurogenāpi hi sattā maranti, sotarogādīnaṃ aññatarenāpi. Kālopi ‘‘imasmiṃyeva kāle maritabbaṃ, nāññasmi’’nti evaṃ vavatthānābhāvato animitto. Pubbaṇhepi hi sattā maranti, majjhanhikādīnaṃ aññatarasmimpi. Dehanikkhepanampi ‘‘idheva mīyamānānaṃ dehena patitabbaṃ, nāññatrā’’ti evaṃ vavatthānābhāvato animittaṃ. Antogāme jātānaṃ hi bahigāmepi attabhāvo patati. Bahigāme jātānampi antogāme. Tathā thalajānaṃ vā jale, jalajānaṃ vā thaleti anekappakārato vitthāretabbaṃ. Gatipi ‘‘ito cutena idha nibbattitabba’’nti evaṃ vavatthānābhāvato animittā. Devalokato hi cutā manussesupi nibbattanti, manussalokato cutā devalokādīnampi yattha katthaci nibbattantīti evaṃ yantayuttagoṇo viya gatipañcake loko samparivattatīti evaṃ animittato maraṇaṃ anussaritabbaṃ.
175已对照

一百七十五、「依时分的限定(addhānaparicchedato)」者:人们的生命之时分,如今是短促的。凡长寿者,[也只活]一百年,或稍多一点。所以世尊说:「诸比丘,人的寿命是短少的。来世是必去的,应当作善,应当行梵行。已生者没有不死的。诸比丘,凡长寿者,[也只活]一百年,或稍多一点。

175. Addhānaparicchedatoti manussānaṃ jīvitassa nāma etarahi paritto addhā. Yo ciraṃ jīvati, so vassasataṃ, appaṃ vā bhiyyo. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘appamidaṃ, bhikkhave, manussānaṃ āyu, gamanīyo samparāyo, kattabbaṃ kusalaṃ, caritabbaṃ brahmacariyaṃ, natthi jātassa amaraṇaṃ. Yo, bhikkhave, ciraṃ jīvati, so vassasataṃ, appaṃ vā bhiyyoti.
已对照

人的寿命是短的,善人应轻视它;

Appamāyumanussānaṃ, hīḷeyya naṃ suporiso;
已对照

应如头上着火者一般而行,没有死不来的。」(《相应部》1.145)

Careyyādittasīsova, natthi maccussa nāgamoti. (saṃ. ni. 1.145);
已对照

[世尊]又说:「诸比丘,从前有一位名叫阿罗迦(Araka)的导师」——应详说那以七个譬喻所庄严的整部经。

Aparampi āha – ‘‘bhūtapubbaṃ, bhikkhave, arako nāma satthā ahosī’’ti sabbampi sattahi upamāhi alaṅkataṃ suttaṃ vitthāretabbaṃ.
缅 1.230已对照

[世尊]又说:「诸比丘,凡有比丘这样修习死随念:『啊,愿我活一昼夜,作意世尊的教法,我所作的确实就多了。』诸比丘,凡有比丘这样修习死随念:『啊,愿我活一白天,作意世尊的教法,我所作的确实就多了。』诸比丘,凡有比丘这样修习死随念:『啊,愿我活到我吃完一顿团食那么久,作意世尊的教法,我所作的确实就多了。』诸比丘,凡有比丘这样修习死随念:『啊,愿我活到我嚼了四五口饭咽下那么久,作意世尊的教法,我所作的确实就多了。』诸比丘,这些比丘被称为放逸而住、为诸漏的灭尽而迟缓地修习死随念的。诸比丘,而凡有比丘这样修习死随念:『啊,愿我活到我嚼了一口饭咽下那么久,作意世尊的教法,我所作的确实就多了。』诸比丘,凡有比丘这样修习死随念:『啊,愿我活到我入息之后出息、或出息之后入息那么久,作意世尊的教法,我所作的确实就多了。』诸比丘,这些比丘被称为不放逸而住、为诸漏的灭尽而锐利地修习死随念的。」(《增支部》6.19)如是,生命的时分是短促的,[只有]仅嚼四五口饭之量,不可信赖——应如是依时分的限定而随念死。

Aparampi āha – ‘‘yocāyaṃ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṃ maraṇassatiṃ bhāveti, aho vatāhaṃ rattindivaṃ jīveyyaṃ, bhagavato sāsanaṃ manasikareyyaṃ, bahuṃ vata me kataṃ assāti. Yocāyaṃ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṃ maraṇassatiṃ bhāveti, aho vatāhaṃ divasaṃ jīveyyaṃ, bhagavato sāsanaṃ manasikareyyaṃ, bahuṃ vata me kataṃ assāti. Yo cāyaṃ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṃ maraṇassatiṃ bhāveti, aho vatāhaṃ tadantaraṃ jīveyyaṃ, yadantaraṃ ekaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ bhuñjāmi, bhagavato sāsanaṃ manasikareyyaṃ, bahuṃ vata me kataṃ assāti. Yo cāyaṃ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṃ maraṇassatiṃ bhāveti, aho vatāhaṃ tadantaraṃ jīveyyaṃ, yadantaraṃ cattāro pañca ālope saṅkhāditvā ajjhoharāmi, bhagavato sāsanaṃ manasikareyyaṃ, bahuṃ vata me kataṃ assāti. Ime vuccanti, bhikkhave, bhikkhū pamattā viharanti, dandhaṃ maraṇassatiṃ bhāventi āsavānaṃ khayāya. Yo ca khvāyaṃ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṃ maraṇassatiṃ bhāveti, aho vatāhaṃ tadantaraṃ jīveyyaṃ, yadantaraṃ ekaṃ ālopaṃ saṅkhāditvā ajjhoharāmi, bhagavato sāsanaṃ manasikareyyaṃ, bahuṃ vata me kataṃ assāti. Yo cāyaṃ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṃ maraṇassatiṃ bhāveti, aho vatāhaṃ tadantaraṃ jīveyyaṃ, yadantaraṃ assasitvā vā passasāmi, passasitvā vā assasāmi, bhagavato sāsanaṃ manasikareyyaṃ, bahuṃ vata me kataṃ assāti. Ime vuccanti, bhikkhave, bhikkhū appamattā viharanti, tikkhaṃ maraṇassatiṃ bhāventi āsavānaṃ khayāyā’’ti (a. ni. 6.19). Evaṃ catupañcālopasaṅkhādanamattaṃ avissāsiyo paritto jīvitassa addhāti evaṃ addhānaparicchedato maraṇaṃ anussaritabbaṃ.
176缅 1.231已对照

一百七十六、「依刹那短促(khaṇaparittato)」者:因为从胜义上说,众生的生命刹那极为短促,仅是一心之转起而已。犹如车轮转动时也只以轮辋的一点而转,静止时也只以一[点]而止;正是这样,众生的生命只是一心刹那,那心一灭,便说众生已灭。即如所说:「于过去心刹那曾活,[今]不活,亦不将活;于未来心刹那不曾活,[今]不活,将活;于现在心刹那不曾活,[今]正活,亦不将活。

「生命、自体,以及纯然的苦乐,

[皆]系属于一心,那刹那轻捷地流转。

「凡于此处,于正死者或正存续者[身中]已灭去的,

一切诸蕴皆同——已去而不再相续。

「未生起者[故]未生,凭现在者而活;

随心之坏灭而世间已死,[所余]是就胜义[所立]的施设。」(《大义释》39)

应如是依刹那短促而随念死。

176. Khaṇaparittatoti paramatthato hi atiparitto sattānaṃ jīvitakkhaṇo ekacittappavattimattoyeva. Yathā nāma rathacakkaṃ pavattamānampi ekeneva nemippadesena pavattati, tiṭṭhamānampi ekeneva tiṭṭhati, evameva ekacittakkhaṇikaṃ sattānaṃ jīvitaṃ. Tasmiṃ citte niruddhamatte satto niruddhoti vuccati. Yathāha – ‘‘atīte cittakkhaṇe jīvittha, na jīvati, na jīvissati. Anāgate cittakkhaṇe na jīvittha, na jīvati, jīvissati. Paccuppanne cittakkhaṇe na jīvittha, jīvati, na jīvissati.
‘‘Jīvitaṃ attabhāvo ca, sukhadukkhā ca kevalā;
Ekacittasamāyuttā, lahu so vattate khaṇo.
‘‘Ye niruddhā marantassa, tiṭṭhamānassa vā idha;
Sabbepi sadisā khandhā, gatā appaṭisandhikā.
‘‘Anibbattena na jāto, paccuppannena jīvati;
Cittabhaṅgā mato loko, paññatti paramatthiyā’’ti. (mahāni. 39);
Evaṃ khaṇaparittato maraṇaṃ anussaritabbaṃ.
177已对照

一百七十七、如是,以这八种行相中的任何一种随念者,依于一再作意,心得到串习,以死为所缘的念安住,诸盖被镇伏,诸禅支显现。然而由于所缘是自性法,又是引生悚惧的,[这禅]未达安止,只成为已达近行的禅。而出世间禅与第二、第四无色禅,即使在自性法上,也依修习的殊胜而达到安止。因为出世间[禅]是依清净修习的次第而达到安止;无色[禅]是依超越所缘的修习[而达到安止]。因为在那里,只是对已达安止的禅[作]超越所缘而已。而在此处,这两者都没有。所以只成为已达近行的禅。这[禅]由于是依死随念之力而生起的,便得名为「死随念」。

而致力于这死随念的比丘,常不放逸,于一切有获得不喜乐想,舍弃对生命的爱著,成为呵责恶者,多不积蓄,于诸资具离了悭垢;他的无常想达到熟习,随之苦想与无我想也现起。犹如未修习死[随念]的众生在临死之时,如同突然被猛兽、夜叉、蛇、盗贼、杀戮者所压倒那样,陷入怖畏、惊恐、迷乱;[他]不陷入这样,无怖畏、不迷乱地命终。若在现法中未得达不死,身坏之后以善趣为归趣。

因此,有善慧者确实应当不放逸,

恒常于如是有大威力的死随念[上]。

这是关于死随念的详说之门。

177. Iti imesaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ ākārānaṃ aññataraññatarena anussaratopi punappunaṃ manasikāravasena cittaṃ āsevanaṃ labhati, maraṇārammaṇā sati santiṭṭhati, nīvaraṇāni vikkhambhanti, jhānaṅgāni pātubhavanti. Sabhāvadhammattā pana saṃvejanīyattā ca ārammaṇassa appanaṃ appatvā upacārappattameva jhānaṃ hoti. Lokuttarajjhānaṃ pana dutiyacatutthāni ca āruppajjhānāni sabhāvadhammepi bhāvanāvisesena appanaṃ pāpuṇanti. Visuddhibhāvanānukkamavasena hi lokuttaraṃ appanaṃ pāpuṇāti. Ārammaṇātikkamabhāvanāvasena āruppaṃ. Appanāpattasseva hi jhānassa ārammaṇasamatikkamanamattaṃ tattha hoti. Idha pana tadubhayampi natthi. Tasmā upacārappattameva jhānaṃ hoti. Tadetaṃ maraṇassatibalena uppannattā maraṇassaticceva saṅkhaṃ gacchati.
Imañca pana maraṇassatiṃ anuyutto bhikkhu satataṃ appamatto hoti, sabbabhavesu anabhiratisaññaṃ paṭilabhati, jīvitanikantiṃ jahāti, pāpagarahī hoti, asannidhibahulo parikkhāresu vigatamalamacchero, aniccasaññā cassa paricayaṃ gacchati, tadanusāreneva dukkhasaññā anattasaññā ca upaṭṭhāti. Yathā abhāvitamaraṇā sattā sahasā vāḷamigayakkhasappacoravadhakābhibhūtā viya maraṇasamaye bhayaṃ santāsaṃ sammohaṃ āpajjanti, evaṃ anāpajjitvā abhayo asammūḷho kālaṃ karoti. Sace diṭṭheva dhamme amataṃ nārādheti, kāyassa bhedā sugatiparāyano hoti.
Tasmā have appamādaṃ, kayirātha sumedhaso;
Evaṃ mahānubhāvāya, maraṇassatiyā sadāti.
Idaṃ maraṇassatiyaṃ vitthārakathāmukhaṃ.
已对照

身至念论

Kāyagatāsatikathā
178缅 1.232已对照

一百七十八、如今,凡在佛出世之外未曾转起、非一切外道之境界,世尊在彼彼经中以多种行相称赞——「诸比丘,一法若修习、多作,导向大悚惧。导向大义利。导向大瑜伽安稳。导向大念与正知。导向智见的获得。导向现法乐住。导向明与解脱之果的作证。哪一法呢?身至念……(《增支部》1.563 等)。诸比丘,凡享用身至念者,他们便享用不死;诸比丘,凡不享用身至念者,他们便不享用不死。诸比丘,他们的不死已被享用……未被享用……已衰损……未衰损……已错失……未错失——凡其身至念已发起者」(《增支部》1.603)——如是称赞之后,以「诸比丘,身至念如何修习、如何多作,才有大果、大功德利益呢?诸比丘,在此,比丘或前往林野」等(《中部》3.154)方式,依入出息节、威仪路节、四正知节、厌恶作意节、界作意节、九墓地节这十四节而解说的身至念业处,它的修习解说已到来。

178. Idāni yaṃ taṃ aññatra buddhuppādā appavattapubbaṃ sabbatitthiyānaṃ avisayabhūtaṃ tesu tesu suttantesu ‘‘ekadhammo, bhikkhave, bhāvito bahulīkato mahato saṃvegāya saṃvattati. Mahato atthāya saṃvattati. Mahato yogakkhemāya saṃvattati. Mahato satisampajaññāya saṃvattati. Ñāṇadassanapaṭilābhāya saṃvattati. Diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārāya saṃvattati. Vijjāvimuttiphalasacchikiriyāya saṃvattati. Katamo ekadhammo? Kāyagatā sati… (a. ni. 1.563 ādayo). Amataṃ te, bhikkhave, paribhuñjanti, ye kāyagatāsatiṃ paribhuñjanti. Amataṃ te, bhikkhave, na paribhuñjanti, ye kāyagatāsatiṃ na paribhuñjanti. Amataṃ tesaṃ, bhikkhave, paribhuttaṃ… aparibhuttaṃ… parihīnaṃ… aparihīnaṃ… viraddhaṃ… aviraddhaṃ, yesaṃ kāyagatāsati āraddhāti (a. ni. 1.603) evaṃ bhagavatā anekehi ākārehi pasaṃsitvā ‘‘kathaṃ bhāvitā, bhikkhave, kāyagatāsati kathaṃ bahulīkatā mahapphalā hoti mahānisaṃsā? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu araññagato vā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 3.154) nayena ānāpānapabbaṃ, iriyāpathapabbaṃ, catusampajaññapabbaṃ, paṭikkūlamanasikārapabbaṃ, dhātumanasikārapabbaṃ, navasivathikapabbānīti imesaṃ cuddasannaṃ pabbānaṃ vasena kāyagatāsatikammaṭṭhānaṃ niddiṭṭhaṃ, tassa bhāvanāniddeso anuppatto.
已对照

此中,因为威仪路节、四正知节、界作意节这三[节]是依观而说的;九墓地节是在诸观智之中依过患随观而说的;而凡在此于膨胀相等上可能成就的定的修习,那已在〈不净[业处]的解说〉中阐明了;唯有入出息节与厌恶作意节这两[节]在此是依定而说的。其中,入出息节依入出息念而本身是一个独立的业处。而凡是这样——「再者,诸比丘,比丘就这个身体,从脚底以上、从发端以下、以皮为边际,观察它充满种种不净:『在这身中有:头发、体毛……乃至……尿。』」(《中部》3.154)——以骨髓摄入脑、依厌恶作意而宣说的三十二行相业处,这在此处被意指为「身至念」。

Tattha yasmā iriyāpathapabbaṃ catusampajaññapabbaṃ dhātumanasikārapabbanti imāni tīṇi vipassanāvasena vuttāni. Nava sivathikapabbāni vipassanāñāṇesuyeva ādīnavānupassanāvasena vuttāni. Yāpi cettha uddhumātakādīsu samādhibhāvanā ijjheyya, sā asubhaniddese pakāsitāyeva. Ānāpānapabbaṃ pana paṭikkūlamanasikārapabbañca imānevettha dve samādhivasena vuttāni. Tesu ānāpānapabbaṃ ānāpānassativasena visuṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃyeva. Yaṃ panetaṃ ‘‘puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu imameva kāyaṃ uddhaṃ pādatalā adho kesamatthakā tacapariyantaṃ pūraṃ nānappakārassa asucino paccavekkhati. Atthi imasmiṃ kāye kesā lomā…pe… mutta’’nti (ma. ni. 3.154) evaṃ matthaluṅgaṃ aṭṭhimiñjena saṅgahetvā paṭikkūlamanasikāravasena desitaṃ dvattiṃsākārakammaṭṭhānaṃ, idamidha kāyagatāsatīti adhippetaṃ.
179缅 1.233已对照

一百七十九、此中,这是以圣典的解释为先导的修习解说。「就这个身体(imameva kāyaṃ)」者:即这四大种所成的腐臭之身。「从脚底以上(uddhaṃ pādatalā)」者:即从脚掌往上。「从发端以下(adho kesamatthakā)」者:即从发梢往下。「以皮为边际(tacapariyantaṃ)」者:即横向以皮所限定。「观察它充满种种不净(pūraṃ nānappakārassa asucino paccavekkhati)」者:即看见「这身体充满了种种的头发等不净」。怎样[看见]呢?「在这身中有:头发……乃至……尿。」

此中,「有(atthi)」者:即存在。「这(imasmiṃ)」者:即于那被说为「从脚底以上、从发端以下、以皮为边际、充满种种不净」的[身]中。「身(kāye)」者:即于躯体中。因为躯体由于是不净的积聚,又由于是可厌的头发等以及眼病等数百种病的生处,故被称为「身(kāya)」。「头发、体毛(kesā lomā)」者:即这头发等三十二行相。此中应知这样的连结:「在这身中有头发,在这身中有体毛」。

因为在这从脚底以上、从发端以下、从皮向四周[算起],仅一寻之量的身躯中,纵然以一切方式搜寻,任何人也见不到任何一点点——或珍珠、或摩尼、或琉璃、或沉香、或郁金、或樟脑、或香粉等——的丝毫净性;反而只见到极为恶臭、令人厌恶、形相不祥的头发、体毛等种种不净之物。因此说:「在这身中有:头发、体毛……乃至……尿。」这是此中依词句连结的解释。

179. Tatthāyaṃ pāḷivaṇṇanāpubbaṅgamo bhāvanāniddeso. Imameva kāyanti imaṃ catumahābhūtikaṃ pūtikāyaṃ. Uddhaṃ pādatalāti pādatalato upari. Adho kesamatthakāti kesaggato heṭṭhā. Tacapariyantanti tiriyaṃ tacaparicchinnaṃ. Pūraṃ nānappakārassa asucino paccavekkhatīti nānappakārakesādiasucibharito ayaṃ kāyoti passati. Kathaṃ? Atthi imasmiṃ kāye kesā…pe… muttanti.
Tattha atthīti saṃvijjanti. Imasminti yvāyaṃ uddhaṃ pādatalā adho kesamatthakā tacapariyanto pūro nānappakārassa asucinoti vuccati, tasmiṃ. Kāyeti sarīre. Sarīraṃ hi asucisañcayato kucchitānaṃ kesādīnañceva cakkhurogādīnañca rogasatānaṃ āyabhūtato kāyoti vuccati. Kesā lomāti ete kesādayo dvattiṃsākārā. Tattha atthi imasmiṃ kāye kesā, atthi imasmiṃ kāye lomāti evaṃ sambandho veditabbo.
Imasmiṃ hi pādatalā paṭṭhāya upari, kesamatthakā paṭṭhāya heṭṭhā, tacato paṭṭhāya paritoti ettake byāmamatte kaḷevare sabbākārenapi vicinanto na koci kiñci muttaṃ vā maṇiṃ vā veḷuriyaṃ vā agaruṃ vā kuṅkumaṃ vā kappūraṃ vā vāsacuṇṇādiṃ vā aṇumattampi sucibhāvaṃ passati, atha kho paramaduggandhajegucchaṃ asirikadassanaṃ nānappakāraṃ kesalomādibhedaṃ asuciṃyeva passati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘atthi imasmiṃ kāye kesā lomā…pe… mutta’’nti. Ayamettha padasambandhato vaṇṇanā.
180缅 1.234已对照

一百八十、而欲修习这业处的初学的良家子,应亲近前述那样的善友,受取这业处。而他为[那人]讲说业处时,也应教示七种学取善巧与十种作意善巧。此中,应如是教示七种学取善巧:依语,依意,依颜色,依形状,依方位,依处所,依界限。

因为在这厌恶作意业处中,即使是通晓三藏者,在作意之时也应首先以语诵习。因为对某些人来说,正在诵习之时业处就变得明显,犹如在住摩罗耶的大天长老(Malayavāsī Mahādevatthera)座下受取业处的两位长老那样。相传,长老被他们请求业处时,[说]「四个月之中只诵习这个」,便给了[他们]三十二行相的圣典。他们虽然熟习两三部尼柯耶,但由于善持教诫,四个月中只诵习三十二行相,就成为须陀洹。所以讲说业处的阿阇梨应对弟子说:「首先以语诵习吧。」

而诵习者应划分皮五法等,依顺、逆[次第]诵习。即说了「头发、体毛、指甲、牙齿、皮肤」之后,再逆着说「皮肤、牙齿、指甲、体毛、头发」。

其次,在肾五法中,说了「肉、腱、骨、骨髓、肾」之后,再逆着说「肾、骨髓、骨、腱、肉,皮肤、牙齿、指甲、体毛、头发」。

然后,在肺五法中,说了「心、肝、肋膜、脾、肺」之后,再逆着说「肺、脾、肋膜、肝、心,肾、骨髓、骨、腱、肉,皮肤、牙齿、指甲、体毛、头发」。

然后,在脑五法中,说了「肠、肠间膜、胃中物、粪、脑」之后,再逆着说「脑、粪、胃中物、肠间膜、肠,肺、脾、肋膜、肝、心,肾、骨髓、骨、腱、肉,皮肤、牙齿、指甲、体毛、头发」。

然后,在脂肪六法中,说了「胆汁、痰、脓、血、汗、脂肪」之后,再逆着说「脂肪、汗、血、脓、痰、胆汁,脑、粪、胃中物、肠间膜、肠,肺、脾、肋膜、肝、心,肾、骨髓、骨、腱、肉,皮肤、牙齿、指甲、体毛、头发」。

然后,在尿六法中,说了「泪、膏、唾、涕、关节滑液、尿」之后,再逆着说「尿、关节滑液、涕、唾、膏、泪,脂肪、汗、血、脓、痰、胆汁,脑、粪、胃中物、肠间膜、肠,肺、脾、肋膜、肝、心,肾、骨髓、骨、腱、肉,皮肤、牙齿、指甲、体毛、头发」。

应如是以语诵习一百次、一千次,甚至十万次。因为以语诵习,业处的圣典就变得纯熟,心不向这里那里奔驰。诸部分变得明显,看起来犹如[交握的]手指之列,犹如篱笆桩之列。

而如以语[诵习],同样也应以意诵习。因为以语诵习是以意诵习的缘;以意诵习是通达[不净]相的缘。

「依颜色(vaṇṇato)」者:应辨定头发等的颜色。

「依形状(saṇṭhānato)」者:应辨定它们的形状。

「依方位(disato)」者:因为在这身体中,脐以上是上方,以下是下方,所以应如是辨定方位:「这部分属于这一方位」。

「依处所(okāsato)」者:应如是辨定各个[部分]的处所:「这部分住立于这一处所」。

「依界限(paricchedato)」者:界限有两种:同分界限与异分界限。此中,应如是了知同分界限:「这部分在下、在上、在横向,以这个为界」。应依不相混杂而如是了知异分界限:「头发不是体毛,体毛也不是头发」。

而如是教示七种学取善巧者,应先了知「这业处在某经中是依厌恶而说的,在某经中是依界而说的」,然后教示。因为这[业处]在《大念处[经]》(《长部》2.377)中只依厌恶而说;在《大象迹喻[经]》(《中部》1.300 等)、《教诫罗睺罗大[经]》(《中部》2.113 等)、《界分别[经]》(《中部》3.342 等)中依界而说;而在《身至念经》(《中部》3.153)中,是就以颜色而[令业处]现起的人,分别了四禅。此中,依界而说的是观业处;依厌恶而说的是止业处。这在此处只是止业处。

180. Imaṃ pana kammaṭṭhānaṃ bhāvetukāmena ādikammikena kulaputtena vuttappakāraṃ kalyāṇamittaṃ upasaṅkamitvā idaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetabbaṃ. Tenāpissa kammaṭṭhānaṃ kathentena sattadhā uggahakosallaṃ dasadhā ca manasikārakosallaṃ ācikkhitabbaṃ. Tattha vacasā manasā vaṇṇato saṇṭhānato disato okāsato paricchedatoti evaṃ sattadhā uggahakosallaṃ ācikkhitabbaṃ.
Imasmiṃ hi paṭikkūlamanasikārakammaṭṭhāne yopi tipiṭako hoti, tenāpi manasikārakāle paṭhamaṃ vācāya sajjhāyo kātabbo. Ekaccassa hi sajjhāyaṃ karontasseva kammaṭṭhānaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti malayavāsī mahādevattherassa santike uggahitakammaṭṭhānānaṃ dvinnaṃ therānaṃ viya. Thero kira tehi kammaṭṭhānaṃ yācito cattāro māse imaṃyeva sajjhāyaṃ karothāti dvattiṃsākārapāḷiṃ adāsi. Te kiñcāpi nesaṃ dve tayo nikāyā paguṇā, padakkhiṇaggāhitāya pana cattāro māse dvattiṃsākāraṃ sajjhāyantāva sotāpannā ahesuṃ. Tasmā kammaṭṭhānaṃ kathentena ācariyena antevāsiko vattabbo ‘‘paṭhamaṃ tāva vācāya sajjhāyaṃ karohī’’ti.
Karontena ca tacapañcakādīni paricchinditvā anulomapaṭilomavasena sajjhāyo kātabbo. Kesā lomā nakhā dantā tacoti hi vatvā puna paṭilomato taco dantā nakhā lomā kesāti vattabbaṃ.
Tadanantaraṃ vakkapañcake maṃsaṃ nhāru aṭṭhi aṭṭhimiñjaṃ vakkanti vatvā puna paṭilomato vakkaṃ aṭṭhimiñjaṃ aṭṭhi nhāru maṃsaṃ, taco dantā nakhā lomā kesāti vattabbaṃ.
Tato papphāsapañcake hadayaṃ yakanaṃ kilomakaṃ pihakaṃ papphāsanti vatvā puna paṭilomato papphāsaṃ pihakaṃ kilomakaṃ yakanaṃ hadayaṃ, vakkaṃ aṭṭhimiñjaṃ aṭṭhi nhāru maṃsaṃ, taco dantā nakhā lomā kesāti vattabbaṃ.
Tato matthaluṅgapañcake antaṃ antaguṇaṃ udariyaṃ karīsaṃ matthaluṅganti vatvā puna paṭilomato matthaluṅgaṃ karīsaṃ udariyaṃ antaguṇaṃ antaṃ, papphāsaṃ pihakaṃ kilomakaṃ yakanaṃ hadayaṃ, vakkaṃ aṭṭhimiñjaṃ aṭṭhi nhāru maṃsaṃ, taco dantā nakhā lomā kesāti vattabbaṃ.
Tato medachakke pittaṃ semhaṃ pubbo lohitaṃ sedo medoti vatvā puna paṭilomato medo sedo lohitaṃ pubbo semhaṃ pittaṃ, matthaluṅgaṃ karīsaṃ udariyaṃ antaguṇaṃ antaṃ, papphāsaṃ pihakaṃ kilomakaṃ yakanaṃ hadayaṃ, vakkaṃ aṭṭhimiñjaṃ aṭṭhi nhāru maṃsaṃ, taco dantā nakhā lomā kesāti vattabbaṃ.
Tato muttachakke assu vasā kheḷo siṅghāṇikā lasikā muttanti vatvā puna paṭilomato muttaṃ lasikā siṅghāṇikā kheḷo vasā assu, medo sedo lohitaṃ pubbo semhaṃ pittaṃ, matthaluṅgaṃ karīsaṃ udariyaṃ antaguṇaṃ antaṃ, papphāsaṃ pihakaṃ kilomakaṃ yakanaṃ hadayaṃ, vakkaṃ aṭṭhimiñjaṃ aṭṭhi nhāru maṃsaṃ, taco dantā nakhā lomā kesāti vattabbaṃ.
Evaṃ kālasataṃ kālasahassaṃ kālasatasahassampi vācāya sajjhāyo kātabbo. Vacasā sajjhāyena hi kammaṭṭhānatanti paguṇā hoti, na ito cito ca cittaṃ vidhāvati. Koṭṭhāsā pākaṭā honti, hatthasaṅkhalikā viya vatipādapanti viya ca khāyanti.
Yathā pana vacasā, tatheva manasāpi sajjhāyo kātabbo. Vacasā sajjhāyo hi manasā sajjhāyassa paccayo hoti. Manasā sajjhāyo lakkhaṇapaṭivedhassa paccayo hoti.
Vaṇṇatoti kesādīnaṃ vaṇṇo vavatthapetabbo.
Saṇṭhānatoti tesaññeva saṇṭhānaṃ vavatthapetabbaṃ.
Disatoti imasmiṃ hi sarīre nābhito uddhaṃ uparimadisā, adho heṭṭhimadisā, tasmā ayaṃ koṭṭhāso imissā nāma disāyāti disā vavatthapetabbā.
Okāsatoti ayaṃ koṭṭhāso imasmiṃ nāma okāse patiṭṭhitoti evaṃ tassa tassa okāso vavatthapetabbo.
Paricchedatoti sabhāgaparicchedo visabhāgaparicchedoti dve paricchedā. Tattha ayaṃ koṭṭhāso heṭṭhā ca upari ca tiriyañca iminā nāma paricchinnoti evaṃ sabhāgaparicchedo veditabbo. Kesā na lomā, lomāpi na kesāti evaṃ amissakatāvasena visabhāgaparicchedo veditabbo.
Evaṃ sattadhā uggahakosallaṃ ācikkhantena pana idaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ asukasmiṃ sutte paṭikkūlavasena kathitaṃ, asukasmiṃ dhātuvasenāti ñatvā ācikkhitabbaṃ. Idañhi mahāsatipaṭṭhāne (dī. ni. 2.377) paṭikkūlavaseneva kathitaṃ. Mahāhatthipadopama(ma. ni. 1.300 ādayo) mahārāhulovāda(ma. ni. 2.113 ādayo) dhātuvibhaṅgesu(ma. ni. 3.342 ādayo) dhātuvasena kathitaṃ. Kāyagatāsatisutte (ma. ni. 3.153) pana yassa vaṇṇato upaṭṭhāti, taṃ sandhāya cattāri jhānāni vibhattāni. Tattha dhātuvasena kathitaṃ vipassanākammaṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Paṭikkūlavasena kathitaṃ samathakammaṭṭhānaṃ. Tadetaṃ idha samathakammaṭṭhānamevāti.
181缅 1.236已对照

一百八十一、如是教示七种学取善巧之后,应如是教示十种作意善巧:依次第,不太快,不太慢,依排除散乱,依超越施设,依次第舍弃,依安止,以及三部经。此中,「依次第(anupubbato)」者:这[业处]从诵习开始,应依次第逐一作意,不应跳隔一个[作意]。因为跳隔一个作意者,犹如不熟练的人跳隔一级攀登三十二级的梯子,身体疲倦而跌落,不能完成攀登;正是这样,由于未证得应依修习的成就而证得的乐味,心疲倦而跌落,不能完成修习。

而依次第作意者,也应不太快地作意。因为太快地作意者,犹如有人走上三由旬的路,不留意[该]拐入与离开[之处],以快速的步伐来回走了一百趟,虽然路程走到了尽头,却仍须问[人]才能走;正是这样,[他]只是使业处到达终点,[业处]却不明晰,带不来殊胜,所以应不太快地作意。

而如不太快,同样也应不太慢。因为太慢地作意者,犹如有人想在当天走完三由旬的路,在途中于树、山、池等处逗留,路程走不到尽头,须两三天才走完;正是这样,业处到不了终点,不成为证得殊胜之缘。

「依排除散乱(vikkhepapaṭibāhanato)」者:应排除舍弃业处而向外于种种所缘上的心之散乱。因为不排除者,犹如有人走上仅容一足的悬崖之路,不留意落脚之处,东张西望,便失足,于是从百人深的悬崖跌下;正是这样,有向外的散乱时,业处便退失、毁坏。所以应依排除散乱而作意。

「依超越施设(paṇṇattisamatikkamanato)」者:应超越这「头发、体毛」等施设,把心安置于「厌恶」。因为犹如在缺水之时,人们在林野中看见一口井,在那里系上一片多罗叶等某种标记,凭着那标记前来沐浴、饮水;而当由于他们频繁往来、来来去去的足迹已明显时,就不必用标记,在想去的任何时候就去沐浴、饮水;正是这样,在前分依「头发、体毛」这施设而作意者,厌恶性便明显。然后应超越「头发、体毛」这施设,只把心安置于厌恶性上。

「依次第舍弃(anupubbamuñcanato)」者:哪个部分不现起,就舍弃那个[部分],应依次第舍弃而作意。因为初学者作意「头发」时,作意前进而只碰触到「尿」这最后的部分而止;作意「尿」时,作意前进而只碰触到「头发」这最初的部分而止。然后当他一再作意时,有些部分现起,有些不现起。因此,应先在那些现起的[部分]上作功夫,直到有两个现起,其中又有一个更善地现起;而对如是现起的那一个,应一再作意,令安止生起。

此中有这个譬喻——犹如想捉住住在有三十二棵多罗树的多罗林中的猕猴的猎人,以箭射穿最前面那棵多罗树的叶子而发出呼喊;于是那猕猴依次落在一棵又一棵多罗树上,直到最后一棵多罗树;猎人在那里也照样做了,[猕猴]又依同样方式回到最前面的多罗树;它如是一再被驱赶,在每一呼喊之处跳起,渐渐落在某一棵多罗树上,紧紧抓住树中央的多罗嫩叶芯,即使被射也不跳起——应知这[修习]也是如此。

此中,这是譬喻的会通——因为犹如多罗林中有三十二棵多罗树,同样,这身中有三十二个部分。心犹如猕猴。瑜伽行者犹如猎人。瑜伽者的心依所缘而在有三十二部分的身中游走,犹如猕猴住在有三十二棵多罗树的多罗林中。瑜伽者开始作意「头发」时,[心]依次前进而只在最后的部分上住立,犹如猎人以箭射穿最前面那棵多罗树的叶子而发出呼喊时,猕猴落在一棵又一棵多罗树上而到达最后一棵多罗树。在返回时也是这个方式。一再作意者,在某些[部分]现起时,舍弃不现起的,在现起的[部分]上作遍作,犹如一再被驱赶的猕猴在每一呼喊之处跳起。最后有两个现起时,对其中更善地现起的那一个一再作意而令安止生起,犹如[猕猴]渐渐落在某一棵多罗树上,紧紧抓住树中央的多罗嫩叶芯,即使被射也不跳起。

另一个譬喻——犹如一位常乞食的比丘,依一个有三十二户人家的村落而住,在第一家就得到两份食物,便舍去后面一家。次日得到三份,便舍去后面两家。第三日在最初[一家]就得到满钵,便去坐堂受用。应知这[修习]也是如此。因为三十二行相犹如有三十二户人家的村落。瑜伽行者犹如常乞食者。瑜伽者在三十二行相上作遍作,犹如他依那村落而住。一再作意者舍弃不现起的,在现起的[部分]上作遍作,直到[剩下]两个部分,犹如在第一家得到两份食物而舍去后面一家,以及第二日得到三份而舍去后面两家。对两个之中更善地现起的那一个一再作意而令安止生起,犹如第三日在最初[一家]就得到满钵,坐在坐堂中受用。

「依安止(appanāto)」者:依安止的部分,应知在头发等每一部分上都有安止——这正是此中的意趣。

「以及三部经(tayo ca suttantā)」者:应知增上心、清凉、觉支善巧这三部经是为了配合精进与定——这是此中的意趣。此中——

「诸比丘,致力于增上心的比丘,应时时作意三种相。应时时作意定相。应时时作意策励相。应时时作意舍相。诸比丘,若致力于增上心的比丘一向只作意定相,那心有可能导向懈怠。诸比丘,若致力于增上心的比丘一向只作意策励相,那心有可能导向掉举。诸比丘,若致力于增上心的比丘一向只作意舍相,那心有可能不为诸漏的灭尽而正确得定。诸比丘,而当致力于增上心的比丘时时作意定相、策励相、舍相时,那心便成为柔软的、适业的、光明的,而且不易碎坏,为诸漏的灭尽而正确得定。

「诸比丘,犹如金匠或金匠的弟子造炉;造了炉之后,点燃炉口;点燃了炉口之后,用钳子夹取金,放入炉口之后,时时吹炼,时时洒水,时时旁观。诸比丘,若金匠或金匠的弟子对那金一向只吹炼,那金有可能被烧焦。诸比丘,若金匠或金匠的弟子对那金一向只洒水,那金有可能冷却。诸比丘,若金匠或金匠的弟子对那金一向只旁观,那金有可能不能正确地达到成熟。诸比丘,而当金匠或金匠的弟子对那金时时吹炼、时时洒水、时时旁观时,那金便成为柔软的、适业的、光明的,而且不易碎坏,正确地堪于作业。无论他想要哪一种装饰品——或是头带,或是耳环,或是项饰,或是金鬘——它都能成就他那目的。

「同样,诸比丘,致力于增上心的……乃至……为诸漏的灭尽而正确得定。凡为证知、作证而使心转向任何应以证知作证之法,当有其因时,他便于彼彼[法]上达到亲证之能。」(《增支部》3.103)

应知这部经是「增上心」。

「诸比丘,具足六法的比丘,能够作证无上清凉。哪六[法]呢?诸比丘,在此,比丘在应抑制心之时抑制心,在应策励心之时策励心,在应令心喜之时令心喜,在应旁观心之时旁观心,倾向于殊胜,好乐涅槃。诸比丘,具足这六法的比丘,能够作证无上清凉。」(《增支部》6.85)

应知这部经是「无上清凉」。

而觉支善巧,已在安止善巧论中显示过了:「正是这样,诸比丘,当心退缩之时,那时不是修习轻安觉支之时。」(《相应部》5.234)

如是,善加学取这七种学取善巧、善加辨定这十种作意善巧之后,那瑜伽者应依两种善巧而好好学取业处。若他与阿阇梨同住一寺是方便的,就不必令[阿阇梨]如是详细讲说,[只要]善加辨定业处,致力于业处,获得殊胜之后,再令[阿阇梨]更进一步讲说。而欲住在他处者,应依前述方法令[阿阇梨]详细讲说,一再温习,断除一切难解之处,正依〈地遍的解说〉中所说的方式,舍弃不适合的坐卧处,住在适合的寺中,作了小障碍的断除之后,在厌恶作意上作遍作。

而作[遍作]者,首先应在头发上取相。怎样[取]呢?拔下一根或两根头发,放在手掌上,首先辨定颜色。在剪[发]之处看头发也可以。在水钵或粥钵中看也同样可以。若在[头发]黑的时候看见,就应作意为「黑的」;在白的时候,[作意为]「白的」;而在[黑白]混杂的时候,应依占多数者而作意。而如在头发上,同样,在整个皮五法上也都应看见之后才取相。

181. Evaṃ sattadhā uggahakosallaṃ ācikkhitvā anupubbato, nātisīghato, nātisaṇikato, vikkhepapaṭibāhanato, paṇṇattisamatikkamanato, anupubbamuñcanato, appanāto, tayo ca suttantāti evaṃ dasadhā manasikārakosallaṃ ācikkhitabbaṃ. Tattha anupubbatoti idañhi sajjhāyakaraṇato paṭṭhāya anupaṭipāṭiyā manasikātabbaṃ, na ekantarikāya. Ekantarikāya hi manasikaronto yathā nāma akusalo puriso dvattiṃsapadaṃ nisseṇiṃ ekantarikāya ārohanto kilantakāyo patati, na ārohanaṃ sampādeti, evameva bhāvanāsampattivasena adhigantabbassa assādassa anadhigamā kilantacitto patati, na bhāvanaṃ sampādeti.
Anupubbato manasikarontenāpi ca nātisīghato manasikātabbaṃ. Atisīghato manasikaroto hi yathā nāma tiyojanamaggaṃ paṭipajjitvā okkamanavissajjanaṃ asallakkhetvā sīghena javena satakkhattumpi gamanāgamanaṃ karoto purisassa kiñcāpi addhānaṃ parikkhayaṃ gacchati, atha kho pucchitvāva gantabbaṃ hoti, evameva kevalaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ pariyosānaṃ pāpuṇāti, avibhūtaṃ pana hoti, na visesaṃ āvahati, tasmā nātisīghato manasikātabbaṃ.
Yathā ca nātisīghato, evaṃ nātisaṇikatopi. Atisaṇikato manasikaroto hi yathā nāma tadaheva tiyojanamaggaṃ gantukāmassa purisassa antarāmagge rukkhapabbatataḷākādīsu vilambamānassa maggo parikkhayaṃ na gacchati, dvīhatīhena pariyosāpetabbo hoti, evameva kammaṭṭhānaṃ pariyosānaṃ na gacchati, visesādhigamassa paccayo na hoti.
Vikkhepapaṭibāhanatoti kammaṭṭhānaṃ vissajjetvā bahiddhā puthuttārammaṇe cetaso vikkhepo paṭibāhitabbo. Appaṭibāhato hi yathā nāma ekapadikaṃ papātamaggaṃ paṭipannassa purisassa akkamanapadaṃ asallakkhetvā ito cito ca vilokayato padavāro virajjhati, tato sataporise papāte patitabbaṃ hoti, evameva bahiddhā vikkhepe sati kammaṭṭhānaṃ parihāyati paridhaṃsati. Tasmā vikkhepapaṭibāhanato manasikātabbaṃ.
Paṇṇattisamatikkamanatoti yāyaṃ kesā lomātiādikā paṇṇatti, taṃ atikkamitvā paṭikkūlanti cittaṃ ṭhapetabbaṃ. Yathā hi udakadullabhakāle manussā araññe udapānaṃ disvā tattha tālapaṇṇādikaṃ kiñcideva saññāṇaṃ bandhitvā tena saññāṇena āgantvā nhāyanti ceva pivanti ca. Yadā pana nesaṃ abhiṇhasañcārena āgatāgatapadaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti, tadā saññāṇena kiccaṃ na hoti, icchiticchitakkhaṇe gantvā nhāyanti ceva pivanti ca, evameva pubbabhāge kesā lomātipaṇṇattivasena manasikaroto paṭikkūlabhāvo pākaṭo hoti. Atha kesā lomātipaṇṇattiṃ samatikkamitvā paṭikkūlabhāveyeva cittaṃ ṭhapetabbaṃ.
Anupubbamuñcanatoti yo yo koṭṭhāso na upaṭṭhāti, taṃ taṃ muñcantena anupubbamuñcanato manasikātabbaṃ. Ādikammikassa hi kesāti manasikaroto manasikāro gantvā muttanti imaṃ pariyosānakoṭṭhāsameva āhacca tiṭṭhati. Muttanti ca manasikaroto manasikāro gantvā kesāti imaṃ ādikoṭṭhāsameva āhacca tiṭṭhati. Athassa manasikaroto manasikaroto keci koṭṭhāsā upaṭṭhahanti, keci na upaṭṭhahanti. Tena ye ye upaṭṭhahanti, tesu tesu tāva kammaṃ kātabbaṃ. Yāva dvīsu upaṭṭhitesu tesampi eko suṭṭhutaraṃ upaṭṭhahati, evaṃ upaṭṭhitaṃ pana tameva punappunaṃ manasikarontena appanā uppādetabbā.
Tatrāyaṃ upamā – yathā hi dvattiṃsatālake tālavane vasantaṃ makkaṭaṃ gahetukāmo luddo ādimhi ṭhitatālassa paṇṇaṃ sarena vijjhitvā ukkuṭṭhiṃ kareyya, atha kho so makkaṭo paṭipāṭiyā tasmiṃ tasmiṃ tāle patitvā pariyantatālameva gaccheyya, tatthapi gantvā luddena tatheva kate puna teneva nayena āditālaṃ āgaccheyya, so evaṃ punappunaṃ paripātiyamāno ukkuṭṭhukkuṭṭhiṭṭhāneyeva uṭṭhahitvā anukkamena ekasmiṃ tāle nipatitvā tassa vemajjhe makuḷatālapaṇṇasūciṃ daḷhaṃ gahetvā vijjhiyamānopi na uṭṭhaheyya, evaṃsampadamidaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
Tatridaṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ – yathā hi tālavane dvattiṃsatālā, evaṃ imasmiṃ kāye dvattiṃsakoṭṭhāsā. Makkaṭo viya cittaṃ. Luddo viya yogāvacaro. Makkaṭassa dvattiṃsatālake tālavane nivāso viya yogino cittassa dvattiṃsakoṭṭhāsake kāye ārammaṇavasena anusañcaraṇaṃ. Luddena ādimhi ṭhitatālassa paṇṇaṃ sarena vijjhitvā ukkuṭṭhiyā katāya makkaṭassa tasmiṃ tasmiṃ tāle patitvā pariyantatālagamanaṃ viya yogino kesāti manasikāre āraddhe paṭipāṭiyā gantvā pariyosānakoṭṭhāseyeva cittassa saṇṭhānaṃ. Puna paccāgamanepi eseva nayo. Punappunaṃ paripātiyamānassa makkaṭassa ukkuṭṭhukkuṭṭhiṭṭhāne uṭṭhānaṃ viya punappunaṃ manasikaroto kesuci kesuci upaṭṭhitesu anupaṭṭhahante vissajjetvā upaṭṭhitesu parikammakaraṇaṃ. Anukkamena ekasmiṃ tāle nipatitvā tassa majjhe makuḷatālapaṇṇasūciṃ daḷhaṃ gahetvā vijjhiyamānassapi anuṭṭhānaṃ viya avasāne dvīsu upaṭṭhitesu yo suṭṭhutaraṃ upaṭṭhāti, tameva punappunaṃ manasikaritvā appanāya uppādanaṃ.
Aparāpi upamā – yathā nāma piṇḍapātiko bhikkhu dvattiṃsakulaṃ gāmaṃ upanissāya vasanto paṭhamageheyeva dve bhikkhā labhitvā parato ekaṃ vissajjeyya. Punadivase tisso labhitvā parato dve vissajjeyya. Tatiyadivase ādimhiyeva pattapūraṃ labhitvā āsanasālaṃ gantvā paribhuñjeyya. Evaṃsampadamidaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Dvattiṃsakulagāmo viya hi dvattiṃsākāro. Piṇḍapātiko viya yogāvacaro. Tassa taṃ gāmaṃ upanissāya vāso viya yogino dvattiṃsākāre parikammakaraṇaṃ. Paṭhamagehe dve bhikkhā labhitvā parato ekissā vissajjanaṃ viya dutiyadivase tisso labhitvā parato dvinnaṃ vissajjanaṃ viya ca manasikaroto manasikaroto anupaṭṭhahante vissajjetvā upaṭṭhitesu yāva koṭṭhāsadvaye parikammakaraṇaṃ. Tatiyadivase ādimhiyeva pattapūraṃ labhitvā āsanasālāyaṃ nisīditvā paribhogo viya dvīsu yo suṭṭhutaraṃ upaṭṭhāti, tameva punappunaṃ manasikaritvā appanāya uppādanaṃ.
Appanātoti appanākoṭṭhāsato kesādīsu ekekasmiṃ koṭṭhāse appanā hotīti veditabbāti ayamevettha adhippāyo.
Tayo ca suttantāti adhicittaṃ, sītibhāvo, bojjhaṅgakosallanti ime tayo suttantā vīriyasamādhiyojanatthaṃ veditabbāti ayamettha adhippāyo. Tattha –
‘‘Adhicittamanuyuttena, bhikkhave, bhikkhunā tīṇi nimittāni kālenakālaṃ manasikātabbāni. Kālenakālaṃ samādhinimittaṃ manasikātabbaṃ. Kālenakālaṃ paggahanimittaṃ manasikātabbaṃ. Kālenakālaṃ upekkhānimittaṃ manasikātabbaṃ. Sace, bhikkhave, adhicittamanuyutto bhikkhu ekantaṃ samādhinimittaññeva manasikareyya, ṭhānaṃ taṃ cittaṃ kosajjāya saṃvatteyya. Sace, bhikkhave, adhicittamanuyutto bhikkhu ekantaṃ paggahanimittaññeva manasikareyya, ṭhānaṃ taṃ cittaṃ uddhaccāya saṃvatteyya. Sace, bhikkhave, adhicittamanuyutto bhikkhu ekantaṃ upekkhānimittaññeva manasikareyya, ṭhānaṃ taṃ cittaṃ na sammā samādhiyeyya āsavānaṃ khayāya. Yato ca kho, bhikkhave, adhicittamanuyutto bhikkhu kālenakālaṃ samādhinimittaṃ paggahanimittaṃ upekkhānimittaṃ manasikaroti, taṃ hoti cittaṃ muduñca kammaññañca pabhassarañca, na ca pabhaṅgu, sammā samādhiyati āsavānaṃ khayāya.
‘‘Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, suvaṇṇakāro vā suvaṇṇakārantevāsī vā ukkaṃ bandhati, ukkaṃ bandhitvā ukkāmukhaṃ ālimpeti, ukkāmukhaṃ ālimpetvā saṇḍāsena jātarūpaṃ gahetvā ukkāmukhe pakkhipitvā kālenakālaṃ abhidhamati, kālenakālaṃ udakena paripphoseti, kālenakālaṃ ajjhupekkhati. Sace, bhikkhave, suvaṇṇakāro vā suvaṇṇakārantevāsī vā taṃ jātarūpaṃ ekantaṃ abhidhameyya, ṭhānaṃ taṃ jātarūpaṃ ḍaheyya. Sace, bhikkhave, suvaṇṇakāro vā suvaṇṇakārantevāsī vā taṃ jātarūpaṃ ekantaṃ udakena paripphoseyya, ṭhānaṃ taṃ jātarūpaṃ nibbāyeyya. Sace, bhikkhave, suvaṇṇakāro vā suvaṇṇakārantevāsī vā taṃ jātarūpaṃ ekantaṃ ajjhupekkheyya, ṭhānaṃ taṃ jātarūpaṃ na sammā paripākaṃ gaccheyya. Yato ca kho, bhikkhave, suvaṇṇakāro vā suvaṇṇakārantevāsī vā taṃ jātarūpaṃ kālenakālaṃ abhidhamati, kālenakālaṃ udakena paripphoseti, kālenakālaṃ ajjhupekkhati, taṃ hoti jātarūpaṃ muduñca kammaññañca pabhassarañca, na ca pabhaṅgu, sammā upeti kammāya. Yassā yassā ca piḷandhanavikatiyā ākaṅkhati yadi paṭikāya yadi kuṇḍalāya yadi gīveyyāya yadi suvaṇṇamālāya, tañcassa atthaṃ anubhoti.
‘‘Evameva kho, bhikkhave, adhicittamanuyuttena…pe… samādhiyati āsavānaṃ khayāya. Yassa yassa ca abhiññā sacchi karaṇīyassa dhammassa cittaṃ abhininnāmeti abhiññā sacchi kiriyāya, tatra tatreva sakkhibhabbataṃ pāpuṇāti sati sati āyatane’’ti (a. ni. 3.103).
Idaṃ suttaṃ adhicittanti veditabbaṃ.
‘‘Chahi, bhikkhave, dhammehi samannāgato bhikkhu bhabbo anuttaraṃ sītibhāvaṃ sacchikātuṃ. Katamehi chahi? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ niggahetabbaṃ, tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ niggaṇhāti. Yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ paggahetabbaṃ, tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ paggaṇhāti. Yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ sampahaṃsitabbaṃ, tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ sampahaṃseti. Yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ ajjhupekkhitabbaṃ, tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ ajjhupekkhati. Paṇītādhimuttiko ca hoti nibbānābhirato. Imehi kho, bhikkhave, chahi dhammehi samannāgato bhikkhu bhabbo anuttaraṃ sītibhāvaṃ sacchikātu’’nti (a. ni. 6.85).
Idaṃ suttaṃ anuttaraṃ sītibhāvoti veditabbaṃ.
Bojjhaṅgakosallaṃ ‘‘pana evameva kho, bhikkhave, yasmiṃ samaye līnaṃ cittaṃ hoti, akālo tasmiṃ samaye passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.234) appanākosallakathāyaṃ dassitameva.
Iti idaṃ sattavidhaṃ uggahakosallaṃ suggahitaṃ katvā idañca dasavidhaṃ manasikārakosallaṃ suṭṭhu vavatthapetvā tena yoginā ubhayakosallavasena kammaṭṭhānaṃ sādhukaṃ uggahetabbaṃ. Sace panassa ācariyena saddhiṃ ekavihāreyeva phāsu hoti, evaṃ vitthārena akathāpetvā kammaṭṭhānaṃ suṭṭhu vavatthapetvā kammaṭṭhānaṃ anuyujjantena visesaṃ labhitvā uparūpari kathāpetabbaṃ. Aññattha vasitukāmena yathāvuttena vidhinā vitthārato kathāpetvā punappunaṃ parivattetvā sabbaṃ gaṇṭhiṭṭhānaṃ chinditvā pathavīkasiṇaniddese vuttanayeneva ananurūpaṃ senāsanaṃ pahāya anurūpe vihāre vasantena khuddakapalibodhupacchedaṃ katvā paṭikkūlamanasikāre parikammaṃ kātabbaṃ.
Karontena pana kesesu tāva nimittaṃ gahetabbaṃ. Kathaṃ? Ekaṃ vā dve vā kese luñcitvā hatthatale ṭhapetvā vaṇṇo tāva vavatthapetabbo. Chinnaṭṭhānepi kese oloketuṃ vaṭṭati. Udakapatte vā yāgupatte vā oloketumpi vaṭṭatiyeva. Kāḷakakāle disvā kāḷakāti manasikātabbā. Setakāle setāti. Missakakāle pana ussadavasena manasikātabbā honti. Yathā ca kesesu, evaṃ sakalepi tacapañcake disvāva nimittaṃ gahetabbaṃ.
已对照

部分差别论

Koṭṭhāsavavatthāpanakathā
182已对照

一百八十二、如是取了相之后,应依颜色、形状、方位、处所、界限辨定一切部分,[再]依颜色、形状、气味、所依、处所,以五种[方式]辨定[它们]为厌恶的。

182. Evaṃ nimittaṃ gahetvā sabbakoṭṭhāse vaṇṇasaṇṭhānadisokāsaparicchedavasena vavatthapetvā vaṇṇasaṇṭhānagandhaāsayokāsavasena pañcadhā paṭikkūlato vavatthapetabbā.
已对照

此中,这是关于一切部分的次第之说。首先,头发依其本来的颜色是黑的,是鲜无患子(addāriṭṭhaka)的颜色。依形状,是长而圆的,如秤杆之形。依方位,生于上方。依处所,两侧以鬓角、前面以额边、后面以颈根为界限。包裹头颅的湿皮,是头发的处所。依界限,头发以下面其自身入于包头之皮约一谷粒尖许而立住的根底、上面以虚空、横向以彼此为界限;没有两根头发[长]在一处——这是同分界限。「头发不是体毛,体毛不是头发」——如是不与其余三十一部分相混杂、名为头发的是一个各别的部分——这是异分界限。这是依颜色等对头发的辨定。

Tatrāyaṃ sabbakoṭṭhāsesu anupubbakathā. Kesā tāva pakativaṇṇena kāḷakā addāriṭṭhakavaṇṇā. Saṇṭhānato dīghavaṭṭalikā tulādaṇḍasaṇṭhānā. Disato uparimadisāya jātā. Okāsato ubhosu passesu kaṇṇacūḷikāhi, purato nalāṭantena, pacchato galavāṭakena paricchinnā. Sīsakaṭāhaveṭhanaṃ allacammaṃ kesānaṃ okāso. Paricchedato kesā sīsaveṭhanacamme vīhaggamattaṃ pavisitvā patiṭṭhitena heṭṭhā attano mūlatalena, upari ākāsena, tiriyaṃ aññamaññena paricchinnā, dve kesā ekato natthīti ayaṃ sabhāgaparicchedo. Kesā na lomā, lomā na kesāti evaṃ avasesaekatiṃsakoṭṭhāsehi amissīkatā kesā nāma pāṭiyekko ekakoṭṭhāsoti ayaṃ visabhāgaparicchedo. Idaṃ kesānaṃ vaṇṇādito vavatthāpanaṃ.
183已对照

一百八十三、而这是依颜色等以五种[方式]辨定它们为厌恶的。这些名为头发的,依颜色也是厌恶的,依形状、依气味、依所依、依处所也是厌恶的。

183. Idaṃ pana nesaṃ vaṇṇādivasena pañcadhā paṭikkūlato vavatthāpanaṃ. Kesā nāmete vaṇṇatopi paṭikkūlā. Saṇṭhānatopi gandhatopi āsayatopi okāsatopi paṭikkūlā.
缅 1.242已对照

因为[人们]即使在可意的粥钵或饭钵中,见到任何头发颜色的东西,也嫌恶道:「这混有头发,把它拿走!」如是,头发依颜色是厌恶的。即使夜里进食时,触到头发形状的牛角瓜(akka)纤维或麻(makaci)纤维,也同样嫌恶。如是,依形状是厌恶的。

Manuññepi hi yāgupatte vā bhattapatte vā kesavaṇṇaṃ kiñci disvā kesamissakamidaṃ haratha nanti jigucchanti. Evaṃ kesā vaṇṇato paṭikkūlā. Rattiṃ bhuñjantāpi kesasaṇṭhānaṃ akkavākaṃ vā makacivākaṃ vā chupitvāpi tatheva jigucchanti. Evaṃ saṇṭhānato paṭikkūlā.
已对照

而离了涂油、花、熏香等修饰的头发,其气味是极可憎的;投入火中的,比那更可憎。因为头发依颜色、形状或许不是厌恶的,而依气味却正是厌恶的。犹如幼小孩童的大便,依颜色是郁金色,依形状也是郁金团之形;又被丢弃在垃圾堆里的膨胀的黑狗尸体,依颜色是熟多罗果之色,依形状是滚转后弃置的鼓之形,它的獠牙也似素馨花蕾——这两者依颜色、形状或许不是厌恶的,而依气味却正是厌恶的。如是,头发依颜色、形状或许也不是厌恶的,而依气味却正是厌恶的。

Telamakkhanapupphadhūpādi saṅkhāravirahitānañca kesānaṃ gandho paramajeguccho hoti. Tato jegucchataro aggimhi pakkhittānaṃ. Kesā hi vaṇṇasaṇṭhānato appaṭikkūlāpi siyuṃ, gandhena pana paṭikkūlāyeva. Yathā hi daharassa kumārassa vaccaṃ vaṇṇato haliddivaṇṇaṃ, saṇṭhānatopi haliddipiṇḍasaṇṭhānaṃ. Saṅkāraṭṭhāne chaḍḍitañca uddhumātakakāḷasunakhasarīraṃ vaṇṇato tālapakkavaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato vaṭṭetvā vissaṭṭhamudiṅgasaṇṭhānaṃ. Dāṭhāpissa sumanamakuḷasadisāti ubhayampi vaṇṇasaṇṭhānato siyā appaṭikkūlaṃ gandhena pana paṭikkūlameva. Evaṃ kesāpi siyuṃ vaṇṇasaṇṭhānato appaṭikkūlā gandhena pana paṭikkūlāyevāti.
已对照

又犹如在不净之处,依村落[流出]的污水而生长的作汤的菜叶,对城里人来说是可憎的、不可受用的;如是,头发也由于是依脓、血、尿、粪、胆汁、痰等的流出物而生长的,所以是可憎的——这是它们依所依的厌恶性。

Yathā pana asuciṭṭhāne gāmanissandena jātāni sūpeyyapaṇṇāni nāgarikamanussānaṃ jegucchāni honti aparibhogāni, evaṃ kesāpi pubbalohitamuttakarīsapittasemhādinissandena jātattā jegucchāti idaṃ nesaṃ āsayato pāṭikkulyaṃ.
已对照

而这些名为头发的,犹如在粪堆上长出的菌,是生于三十一部分之堆中的。它们犹如生于冢间、垃圾堆等处的菜蔬,又犹如生于沟渠等处的莲花、青莲等花,由于生于不净之处,所以是极可憎的——这是它们依处所的厌恶性。

Ime ca kesā nāma gūtharāsimhi uṭṭhitakaṇṇikaṃ viya ekatiṃsakoṭṭhāsarāsimhi jātā. Te susānasaṅkāraṭṭhānādīsu jātasākaṃ viya parikkhādīsu jātakamalakuvalayādipupphaṃ viya ca asuciṭṭhāne jātattā paramajegucchāti idaṃ nesaṃ okāsato pāṭikkulyaṃ.
已对照

又如头发[的厌恶性],一切部分的厌恶性也应如是依颜色、形状、气味、所依、处所以五种[方式]而知;而依颜色、形状、方位、处所、界限,则应把一切[部分]一一分别辨定。

Yathā ca kesānaṃ, evaṃ sabbakoṭṭhāsānaṃ vaṇṇasaṇṭhānagandhāsayokāsavasena pañcadhā paṭikkūlatā veditabbā. Vaṇṇasaṇṭhānadisokāsaparicchedavasena pana sabbepi visuṃ visuṃ vavatthapetabbā.
184缅 1.243已对照

一百八十四、此中,首先,体毛依其本来的颜色,不像头发那样纯黑,而是黑褐色的。依形状,是末端下弯的,如多罗树根之形。依方位,生于两方。依处所,除了头发所立住之处与手掌、脚掌之外,大多生于包裹其余身体的皮上。依界限,以下面其自身入于包身之皮约一虮许而立住的根底、上面以虚空、横向以彼此为界限;没有两根体毛[长]在一处——这是它们的同分界限。而异分界限则与头发相同。

184. Tattha lomā tāva pakativaṇṇato na kesā viya asambhinnakāḷakā, kāḷapiṅgalā pana honti. Saṇṭhānato onataggā tālamūlasaṇṭhānā. Disato dvīsu disāsu jātā. Okāsato ṭhapetvā kesānaṃ patiṭṭhitokāsañca hatthapādatalāni ca yebhuyyena avasesasarīraveṭhanacamme jātā. Paricchedato sarīraveṭhanacamme likhāmattaṃ pavisitvā patiṭṭhitena heṭṭhā attano mūlatalena, upari ākāsena, tiriyaṃ aññamaññena paricchinnā, dve lomā ekato natthi, ayaṃ nesaṃ sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
185已对照

一百八十五、指甲者:是二十片甲片的名称。它们全都依颜色是白色的。依形状,如鱼鳞之形。依方位,脚指甲在下方、手指甲在上方,如是生于两方。依处所,立住于诸指的末端背面。依界限,以两侧的指端之肉、里面的指背之肉、外面及末端的虚空、横向以彼此为界限;没有两片指甲[长]在一处——这是它们的同分界限。而异分界限则与头发相同。

185. Nakhāti vīsatiyā nakhapattānaṃ nāmaṃ. Te sabbepi vaṇṇato setā. Saṇṭhānato macchasakalikasaṇṭhānā. Disato pādanakhā heṭṭhimadisāya, hatthanakhā uparimadisāyāti dvīsu disāsu jātā. Okāsato aṅgulīnaṃ aggapiṭṭhesu patiṭṭhitā. Paricchedato dvīsu disāsu aṅgulikoṭimaṃsehi, anto aṅgulipiṭṭhimaṃsena, bahi ceva agge ca ākāsena, tiriyaṃ aññamaññena paricchinnā, dve nakhā ekato natthi, ayaṃ nesaṃ sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
186已对照

一百八十六、牙齿者:是牙齿完具者的三十二颗齿骨。它们也依颜色是白色的。依形状,有种种形状。因为它们之中,首先在下排牙齿的中间,四颗牙齿如依次插立在泥团上的葫芦子之形;在它们两侧,各有一颗单根单尖的,如茉莉花蕾之形;其次各有一颗双根双尖的,如车的支柱之形;其次各两颗是三根三尖的;其次各两颗是四根四尖的。上排也是这一方法。依方位,生于上方。依处所,立住于两块颚骨上。依界限,以下面其自身立住于颚骨中的根底、上面以虚空、横向以彼此为界限;没有两颗牙齿[长]在一处——这是它们的同分界限。而异分界限则与头发相同。

186. Dantāti paripuṇṇadantassa dvattiṃsa dantaṭṭhikāni. Tepi vaṇṇato setā. Saṇṭhānato anekasaṇṭhānā. Tesaṃ hi heṭṭhimāya tāva dantapāḷiyā majjhe cattāro dantā mattikāpiṇḍe paṭipāṭiyā ṭhapitaalābubījasaṇṭhānā. Tesaṃ ubhosu passesu ekeko ekamūlako ekakoṭiko mallikamakuḷasaṇṭhāno. Tato ekeko dvimūlako dvikoṭiko yānakaupatthambhinisaṇṭhāno. Tato dve dve timūlā tikoṭikā. Tato dve dve catumūlā catukoṭikāti. Uparimapāḷiyāpi eseva nayo. Disato uparimadisāya jātā. Okāsato dvīsu hanukaṭṭhikesu patiṭṭhitā. Paricchedato heṭṭhā hanukaṭṭhike patiṭṭhitena attano mūlatalena, upari ākāsena, tiriyaṃ aññamaññena paricchinnā, dve dantā ekato natthi, ayaṃ nesaṃ sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
187已对照

一百八十七、皮肤者:是包裹全身而住的皮。在它上面有黑、褐、黄等颜色的,名为表皮;它即使从全身刮集起来,也只有枣核大小。而皮肤依颜色唯是白色的;它的白色,在表皮被火焰的灼伤、兵器的击打等所破坏时便显露出来。依形状,唯是身体的形状。这是此中的略说。

187. Tacoti sakalasarīraṃ veṭhetvā ṭhitacammaṃ. Tassa upari kāḷasāmapītādivaṇṇā chavi nāma yā sakalasarīratopi saṅkaḍḍhiyamānā badaraṭṭhimattā hoti. Taco pana vaṇṇato setoyeva. So cassa setabhāvo aggijālābhighātapaharaṇappahārādīhi viddhaṃsitāya chaviyā pākaṭo hoti. Saṇṭhānato sarīrasaṇṭhānova hoti. Ayamettha saṅkhepo.
缅 1.244已对照

而依详说:脚趾的皮肤如蚕茧之形;脚背的皮肤如有包覆、系带的鞋之形;小腿的皮肤如包饭的多罗叶之形;大腿的皮肤如装满米的长袋之形;臀部的皮肤如盛满水的布滤水囊之形;背部的皮肤如蒙在木板上的皮之形;腹部的皮肤如蒙在琵琶槽上的皮之形;胸部的皮肤大致是方形的;两臂的皮肤如蒙在箭筒上的皮之形;手背的皮肤如剃刀匣之形,或如梳袋之形;手指的皮肤如钥匙匣之形;颈部的皮肤如领套之形;面部的皮肤有大大小小的孔,如虫巢之形;头部的皮肤如钵袋之形。

Vitthārato pana pādaṅgulittaco kosakārakakosasaṇṭhāno. Piṭṭhipādattaco puṭabandhaupāhanasaṇṭhāno. Jaṅghattaco bhattapuṭakatālapaṇṇasaṇṭhāno. Ūruttaco taṇḍulabharitadīghatthavikasaṇṭhāno. Ānisadattaco udakapūritapaṭaparissāvanasaṇṭhāno. Piṭṭhittaco phalakonaddhacammasaṇṭhāno. Kucchittaco vīṇādoṇikonaddhacammasaṇṭhāno. Urattaco yebhuyyena caturassasaṇṭhāno. Ubhayabāhuttaco tūṇironaddhacammasaṇṭhāno. Piṭṭhihatthattaco khurakosasaṇṭhāno, phaṇakatthavikasaṇṭhāno vā. Hatthaṅgulittaco kuñcikākosakasaṇṭhāno. Gīvattaco galakañcukasaṇṭhāno. Mukhattaco chiddāvachiddo kīṭakulāvakasaṇṭhāno. Sīsattaco pattatthavikasaṇṭhānoti.
已对照

而把握皮肤的瑜伽行者,应从上唇开始,把智向上推向面部,首先辨定包覆面部而住的皮;其次[辨定]额骨的皮;其次,犹如在放入袋中的钵与袋之间[伸入]手一般,在头骨与头皮之间推入智,分离皮与骨相连之状,而辨定头皮;其次[辨定]肩部的皮;其次顺着、逆着[辨定]右手的皮;接着依同一方法[辨定]左手的皮;其次[辨定]背部的皮,辨定了它之后,顺着、逆着[辨定]右脚的皮;接着依同一方法[辨定]左脚的皮;其次应依次辨定小腹、腹部、心窝、颈部的皮;接着在颈部的皮之后辨定下颚的皮,推至下唇为止,而后完成。如是一一把握粗显者时,细微者也会显现。依方位,生于两方。依处所,包覆全身而住。依界限,以下面[其]立住的底面、上面以虚空为界限——这是它的同分界限。而异分界限则与头发相同。

Tacapariggaṇhakena ca yogāvacarena uttaroṭṭhato paṭṭhāya uparimukhaṃ ñāṇaṃ pesetvā paṭhamaṃ tāva mukhaṃ pariyonandhitvā ṭhitacammaṃ vavatthapetabbaṃ. Tato nalāṭaṭṭhicammaṃ. Tato thavikāya pakkhittapattassa ca thavikāya ca antarena hatthamiva sīsaṭṭhikassa ca sīsacammassa ca antarena ñāṇaṃ pesetvā aṭṭhikena saddhiṃ cammassa ekābaddhabhāvaṃ viyojentena sīsacammaṃ vavatthapetabbaṃ. Tato khandhacammaṃ. Tato anulomena paṭilomena ca dakkhiṇahatthacammaṃ. Atha teneva nayena vāmahatthacammaṃ. Tato piṭṭhicammaṃ taṃ vavatthapetvā anulomena paṭilomena ca dakkhiṇapādacammaṃ. Atha teneva nayena vāmapādacammaṃ. Tato anukkameneva vatthiudarahadayagīvacammāni vavatthapetabbāni. Atha gīvacammānantaraṃ heṭṭhimahanucammaṃ vavatthapetvā adharoṭṭhapariyosānaṃ pāpetvā niṭṭhapetabbaṃ. Evaṃ oḷārikoḷārikaṃ pariggaṇhantassa sukhumampi pākaṭaṃ hoti. Disato dvīsu disāsu jāto. Okāsato sakalasarīraṃ pariyonandhitvā ṭhito. Paricchedato heṭṭhā patiṭṭhitatalena, upari ākāsena paricchinno, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
188缅 1.245已对照

一百八十八、肉者:是九百块肉片。它全都依颜色是红色的,似甄叔迦花。依形状,小腿肚的肉如多罗叶包饭之形;大腿的肉如磨石的碾子之形;臀部的肉如灶的边角之形;背部的肉如多罗糖饼之形;两肋的肉如涂在谷仓内壁的薄泥之形;乳房的肉如揉成团后抛下的泥团之形;两臂的肉如剥了皮、折成两叠放着的大老鼠之形。如是一一把握粗显者时,细微者也会显现。依方位,生于两方。依处所,涂覆三百二十块骨而住。依界限,以下面立住于骨架上的底面、上面以皮肤、横向以彼此为界限——这是它的同分界限。而异分界限则与头发相同。

188. Maṃsanti nava maṃsapesisatāni. Taṃ sabbampi vaṇṇato rattaṃ kiṃsukapupphasadisaṃ. Saṇṭhānato jaṅghapiṇḍikamaṃsaṃ tālapaṇṇapuṭabhattasaṇṭhānaṃ. Ūrumaṃsaṃ nisadapotasaṇṭhānaṃ. Ānisadamaṃsaṃ uddhanakoṭisaṇṭhānaṃ. Piṭṭhimaṃsaṃ tālaguḷapaṭalasaṇṭhānaṃ. Phāsukadvayamaṃsaṃ koṭṭhalikāya kucchiyaṃ tanumattikālepasaṇṭhānaṃ. Thanamaṃsaṃ vaṭṭetvā avakkhittamattikāpiṇḍasaṇṭhānaṃ. Bāhudvayamaṃsaṃ dviguṇaṃ katvā ṭhapitaniccammamahāmūsikasaṇṭhānaṃ. Evaṃ oḷārikoḷārikaṃ pariggaṇhantassa sukhumampi pākaṭaṃ hoti. Disato dvīsu disāsu jātaṃ. Okāsato vīsādhikāni tīṇi aṭṭhisatāni anulimpitvā ṭhitaṃ. Paricchedato heṭṭhā aṭṭhisaṅghāte patiṭṭhitatalena, upari tacena, tiriyaṃ aññamaññena paricchinnaṃ, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
189已对照

一百八十九、腱者:是九百条腱。依颜色,一切腱都是白色的。依形状,有种种形状。因为它们之中,从颈的上部开始,有五条大腱缠绕着身体沿前侧下行,五条沿后侧,五条沿右侧,五条沿左侧;缠绕右手的,在手的前侧也有五条,后侧五条;缠绕左手的也是如此;缠绕右脚的,在脚的前侧也有五条,后侧五条;缠绕左脚的也是如此。如是,名为「持身者」的六十条大腱缠绕着身体而下行,它们也被称为「筋(kaṇḍarā)」。它们全都如甘达拉(kandala)花蕾之形。而其他的[腱]覆盖着各个部位而住;比那些更细的,如线绳之形;另有比那些更细的,如臭藤之形;另有比那些更细的,如大琵琶的弦之形;另有的如粗线之形。手背、脚背上的腱,如鸟足之形;头上的腱,如孩童的头网之形;背上的腱,如摊在日中的湿网之形;其余随着各个大小肢体的腱,如穿在身上的网衣之形。依方位,生于两方。依处所,在全身系缚诸骨而住。依界限,以下面立住于三百块骨之上的底面、上面以触及肉与皮而住的部位、横向以彼此为界限——这是它们的同分界限。而异分界限则与头发相同。

189. Nhārūti nava nhārusatāni. Vaṇṇato sabbepi nhārū setā. Saṇṭhānato nānāsaṇṭhānā. Etesu hi gīvāya uparimabhāgato paṭṭhāya pañca mahānhārū sarīraṃ vinandhamānā purimapassena otiṇṇā. Pañca pacchimapassena. Pañca dakkhiṇapassena. Pañca vāmapassena. Dakkhiṇahatthaṃ vinandhamānāpi hatthassa purimapassena pañca. Pacchimapassena pañca. Tathā vāmahatthaṃ vinandhamānā. Dakkhiṇapādaṃ vinandhamānāpi pādassa purimapassena pañca. Pacchimapassena pañca. Tathā vāmapādaṃ vinandhamānāpīti evaṃ sarīradhārakā nāma saṭṭhimahānhārū kāyaṃ vinandhamānā otiṇṇā. Ye kaṇḍarātipi vuccanti. Te sabbepi kandalamakuḷasaṇṭhānā. Aññe pana taṃ taṃ padesaṃ ajjhottharitvā ṭhitā. Tato sukhumatarā suttarajjukasaṇṭhānā. Aññe tato sukhumatarā pūtilatāsaṇṭhānā, aññe tato sukhumatarā mahāvīṇātantisaṇṭhānā. Aññe thūlasuttakasaṇṭhānā. Hatthapādapiṭṭhīsu nhārū sakuṇapādasaṇṭhānā. Sīse nhārū dārakānaṃ sīsajālakasaṇṭhānā. Piṭṭhiyaṃ nhārū ātape pasāritaallajālasaṇṭhānā. Avasesā taṃtaṃaṅgapaccaṅgānugatā nhārū sarīre paṭimukkajālakañcukasaṇṭhānā. Disato dvīsu disāsu jātā. Okāsato sakalasarīre aṭṭhīni ābandhitvā ṭhitā. Paricchedato heṭṭhā tiṇṇaṃ aṭṭhisatānaṃ upari patiṭṭhitatalehi, upari maṃsacammāni āhacca ṭhitappadesehi, tiriyaṃ aññamaññena paricchinnā, ayaṃ nesaṃ sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
190缅 1.246已对照

一百九十、骨者:除了三十二颗齿骨之外,其余的是:六十四块手骨,六十四块脚骨,六十四块依附于肉的软骨,两块脚跟骨,每只脚上各两块踝骨,两块小腿骨,一块膝骨,一块大腿骨,两块腰骨,十八块脊骨,二十四块肋骨,十四块胸骨,一块心骨,两块锁骨,两块肩胛骨,两块上臂骨,[每臂]各两块前臂骨,七块颈骨,两块颚骨,一块鼻骨,两块眼骨,两块耳骨,一块额骨,一块顶骨,九块头盖骨——如是约三百块骨。它们全都依颜色是白色的。依形状,有种种形状。

190. Aṭṭhīti ṭhapetvā dvattiṃsa dantaṭṭhīni avasesāni catusaṭṭhi hatthaṭṭhīni, catusaṭṭhi pādaṭṭhīni, catusaṭṭhi maṃsanissitāni muduaṭṭhīni, dve paṇhikaṭṭhīni, ekekasmiṃ pāde dve dve gopphakaṭṭhīni, dve jaṅghaṭṭhīni, ekaṃ jaṇṇukaṭṭhi, ekaṃ ūruṭṭhi, dve kaṭiṭṭhīni, aṭṭhārasa piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṭṭhīni, catuvīsati phāsukaṭṭhīni, cuddasa uraṭṭhīni, ekaṃ hadayaṭṭhi, dve akkhakaṭṭhīni, dve koṭṭaṭṭhīni, dve bāhuṭṭhīni, dve dve aggabāhuṭṭhīni, satta gīvaṭṭhīni, dve hanukaṭṭhīni, ekaṃ nāsikaṭṭhi, dve akkhiṭṭhīni, dve kaṇṇaṭṭhīni, ekaṃ nalāṭaṭṭhi. Ekaṃ muddhaṭṭhi, nava sīsakapālaṭṭhīnīti evaṃ timattāni aṭṭhisatāni, tāni sabbānipi vaṇṇato setāni. Saṇṭhānato nānāsaṇṭhānāni.
已对照

因为此中,脚趾末节的骨,如清水果(kataka)的种子之形;紧接着它们的中节骨,如波罗蜜果核之形;根节骨,如小鼓之形;脚背骨,如捣碎的甘达拉球茎之堆的形状;脚跟骨,如单核多罗果的种子之形;踝骨,如捆起来的游戏用球之形;小腿骨立于踝骨上的部位,如剥了皮的信地(sindi)树嫩芽之形;小的小腿骨,如弓杆之形;大的,如干瘪的蛇背之形;膝骨,如一边消蚀了的泡沫团之形;此中,小腿骨立于其上的部位,如尖端不锐的牛角之形;大腿骨,如砍削粗劣的扁斧或斧头的柄之形;它立于腰骨上的部位,如游戏用球之形;腰骨上它所立住的部位,如削去顶端的大奔那伽(punnāga)果之形。

Tattha hi aggapādaṅguliaṭṭhīni katakabījasaṇṭhānāni. Tadanantarāni majjhapabbaṭṭhīni panasaṭṭhisaṇṭhānāni. Mūlapabbaṭṭhīni paṇavasaṇṭhānāni. Piṭṭhipādaṭṭhīni koṭṭitakandalakandarāsisaṇṭhānāni. Paṇhikaṭṭhi ekaṭṭhitālaphalabījasaṇṭhānaṃ. Gopphakaṭṭhīni baddhakīḷāgoḷakasaṇṭhānāni. Jaṅghaṭṭhīnaṃ gopphakaṭṭhīsu patiṭṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ apanītatacasindikaḷīrasaṇṭhānaṃ. Khuddakajaṅghaṭṭhikaṃ dhanukadaṇḍasaṇṭhānaṃ. Mahantaṃ milātasappapiṭṭhisaṇṭhānaṃ. Jaṇṇukaṭṭhi ekato parikkhīṇapheṇakasaṇṭhānaṃ. Tattha jaṅghaṭṭhikassa patiṭṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ atikhiṇaggagosiṅgasaṇṭhānaṃ. Ūruṭṭhi duttacchitavāsiparasudaṇḍasaṇṭhānaṃ. Tassa kaṭiṭṭhimhi patiṭṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ kīḷāgoḷakasaṇṭhānaṃ. Tena kaṭiṭṭhino patiṭṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ aggacchinnamahāpunnāgaphalasaṇṭhānaṃ.
已对照

两块腰骨相连为一,如陶匠的灶之形;各别[看],如铁匠锤子的套环之形;位于末端的臀骨,如翻转过来拿着的蛇冠之形,有七八处大大小小的孔;脊骨从内侧[看],如一层层叠放的铅片卷之形,从外侧[看],如串起的轮环之形;它们中间各处有两三根如锯齿的棘突。二十四块肋骨中,不完整的,如不完整的刀之形;完整的,如完整的刀之形;全部[合起来],如白公鸡张开的翅膀之形。十四块胸骨,如旧车舆的栏架之形。心骨,如匙头之形。

Kaṭiṭṭhīni dvepi ekābaddhāni hutvā kumbhakārikauddhanasaṇṭhānāni. Pāṭiyekkaṃ kammārakūṭayottakasaṇṭhānāni. Koṭiyaṃ ṭhitaṃ ānisadaṭṭhi adhomukhaṃ katvā gahitasappaphaṇasaṇṭhānaṃ, sattaṭṭhaṭṭhānesu chiddāvachiddaṃ. Piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṭṭhīni abbhantarato uparūpari ṭhapitasīsapaṭṭaveṭhakasaṇṭhānāni. Bāhirato vaṭṭanāvaḷisaṇṭhānāni. Tesaṃ antarantarā kakacadantasadisā dve tayo kaṇṭakā honti. Catuvīsatiyā phāsukaṭṭhīsu aparipuṇṇāni aparipuṇṇaasisaṇṭhānāni. Paripuṇṇāni paripuṇṇaasisaṇṭhānāni. Sabbānipi odātakukkuṭassa pasāritapakkhasaṇṭhānāni. Cuddasa uraṭṭhīni jiṇṇasandamānikapañjarasaṇṭhānāni. Hadayaṭṭhi dabbiphaṇasaṇṭhānaṃ.
缅 1.247已对照

锁骨,如小铁扁斧的柄之形;肩胛骨,如一边磨损了的师子洲锄头之形;上臂骨,如镜柄之形;前臂骨,如一对多罗球茎之形;腕骨,如粘在一起放着的铅片卷之形;手背骨,如捣碎的甘达拉球茎之堆的形状;手指的根节骨,如小鼓之形;中节骨,如未长成的波罗蜜果核之形;末节骨,如清水果的种子之形。

Akkhakaṭṭhīni khuddakalohavāsidaṇḍasaṇṭhānāni. Koṭṭaṭṭhīni ekato parikkhīṇasīhaḷakuddālasaṇṭhānāni. Bāhuṭṭhīni ādāsadaṇḍakasaṇṭhānāni. Aggabāhuṭṭhīni yamakatālakandasaṇṭhānāni. Maṇibandhaṭṭhīni ekato alliyāpetvā ṭhapitasīsakapaṭṭaveṭhakasaṇṭhānāni. Piṭṭhihatthaṭṭhīni koṭṭitakandalakandarāsisaṇṭhānāni. Hatthaṅgulīsu mūlapabbaṭṭhīni paṇavasaṇṭhānāni. Majjhapabbaṭṭhīni aparipuṇṇapanasaṭṭhisaṇṭhānāni. Aggapabbaṭṭhīni katakabījasaṇṭhānāni.
已对照

七块颈骨,如以杖贯穿、依次排列的竹笋圆片之形;下颚骨,如铁匠们的铁锤套环之形;上[颚骨],如刮削用的小刀之形;眼窝骨与鼻窝骨,如挖去了仁的嫩多罗果核之形;额骨,如口朝下放着的贝壳碗的碎片之形;鬓角骨,如理发匠的剃刀匣之形;额与鬓角上方系头带之处的骨,如满罐[上结成]的收缩了的薄膜之片的形状;顶骨,如切去了口的弯椰子之形;头骨,如缝合起来放着的老葫芦壳之形。

Satta gīvaṭṭhīni daṇḍena vijjhitvā paṭipāṭiyā ṭhapitavaṃsakaḷīracakkalakasaṇṭhānāni. Heṭṭhimahanukaṭṭhi kammārānaṃ ayokūṭayottakasaṇṭhānaṃ. Uparimaṃ avalekhanasatthakasaṇṭhānaṃ. Akkhikūpanāsakūpaṭṭhīni apanītamiñjataruṇatālaṭṭhisaṇṭhānāni. Nalāṭaṭṭhi adhomukhaṭṭhapitasaṅkhathālakakapālasaṇṭhānaṃ. Kaṇṇacūḷikaṭṭhīni nhāpitakhurakosasaṇṭhānāni. Nalāṭakaṇṇacūḷikānaṃ upari paṭṭabandhanokāse aṭṭhisaṅkuṭitaghaṭapuṇṇapaṭalakhaṇḍasaṇṭhānaṃ. Muddhaṭṭhi mukhacchinnavaṅkanāḷikerasaṇṭhānaṃ. Sīsaṭṭhīni sibbetvā ṭhapitajajjaralābukaṭāhasaṇṭhānāni.
已对照

依方位,生于两方。依处所,概括而言,住于全身;而此中分别而言,头骨立住于颈骨上,颈骨[立住]于脊骨上,脊骨[立住]于腰骨上,腰骨[立住]于大腿骨上,大腿骨[立住]于膝骨上,膝骨[立住]于小腿骨上,小腿骨[立住]于踝骨上,踝骨立住于脚背骨上。依界限,以里面的骨髓、外面的肉、末端与根部的彼此为界限——这是它们的同分界限。而异分界限则与头发相同。

Disato dvīsu disāsu jātāni. Okāsato avisesena sakalasarīre ṭhitāni. Visesena panettha sīsaṭṭhīni givaṭṭhīsu patiṭṭhitāni. Gīvaṭṭhīni piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṭṭhīsu. Piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṭṭhīni kaṭiṭṭhīsu. Kaṭiṭṭhīni ūruṭṭhīsu. Ūruṭṭhīni jaṇṇukaṭṭhīsu. Jaṇṇukaṭṭhīni jaṅghaṭṭhīsu. Jaṅghaṭṭhīni gopphakaṭṭhīsu. Gopphakaṭṭhīni piṭṭhipādaṭṭhīsu patiṭṭhitāni. Paricchedato anto aṭṭhimiñjena, uparito maṃsena, agge mūle ca aññamaññena paricchinnāni, ayaṃ nesaṃ sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
191已对照

一百九十一、骨髓者:是在各块骨内的髓。它依颜色是白色的。依形状,在各块大骨内的,如放入竹筒中蒸软的大藤笋之形;在各块细小之骨内的,如放入竹竿节中蒸软的细藤笋之形。依方位,生于两方。依处所,立住于诸骨之内。依界限,以诸骨的内壁为界限——这是它的同分界限。而异分界限则与头发相同。

191. Aṭṭhimiñjanti tesaṃ tesaṃ aṭṭhīnaṃ abbhantaragataṃ miñjaṃ. Taṃ vaṇṇato setaṃ. Saṇṭhānato mahantamahantānaṃ aṭṭhīnaṃ abbhantaragataṃ veḷunāḷiyaṃ pakkhittaseditamahāvettaggasaṇṭhānaṃ. Khuddānukhuddakānaṃ abbhantaragataṃ veḷuyaṭṭhipabbesu pakkhittaseditatanuvettaggasaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato dvīsu disāsu jātaṃ. Okāsato aṭṭhīnaṃ abbhantare patiṭṭhitaṃ. Paricchedato aṭṭhīnaṃ abbhantaratalehi paricchinnaṃ, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
192缅 1.248已对照

一百九十二、肾者:是由一条系带[连着]的两块肉团。它依颜色是淡红的,是刺桐(pāḷibhaddaka)子的颜色。依形状,如孩童们的一对游戏用球之形,或如系于同一果柄的两个芒果之形。依方位,生于上方。依处所,被一条从颈根伸出、单根前行少许后分为两支的粗腱所系,环绕着心肉而住。依界限,肾以肾之分为界限——这是它的同分界限。而异分界限则与头发相同。

192. Vakkanti ekabandhanā dve maṃsapiṇḍikā. Taṃ vaṇṇato mandarattaṃ pāḷibhaddakaṭṭhivaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato dārakānaṃ yamakakīḷāgoḷakasaṇṭhānaṃ, ekavaṇṭapaṭibaddhaambaphaladvayasaṇṭhānaṃ vā. Disato uparimāya disāya jātaṃ. Okāsato galavāṭakā nikkhantena ekamūlena thokaṃ gantvā dvidhā bhinnena thūlanhārunā vinibaddhaṃ hutvā hadayamaṃsaṃ parikkhipitvā ṭhitaṃ. Paricchedato vakkaṃ vakkabhāgena paricchinnaṃ, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
193已对照

一百九十三、心者:即心肉。它依颜色是红莲花瓣背面的颜色。依形状,如去掉了外层花瓣、口朝下放着的莲花蕾之形;外面光滑,里面似丝瓜(kosātakī)果实的内部。有慧者的稍稍开张,慧钝者的只是合拢的花蕾。而在它里面有一个约容一颗奔那伽果核大小的凹窝,那里积存着约半掬的血,意界与意识界依于它而转起。而那[血],贪行者的是红色的,瞋行者的是黑色的,痴行者的似洗肉的水,寻行者的是马豆汤之色,信行者的是迦尼迦罗花之色,慧行者的则是清澈、明净、不浊、洁白、遍净的,如洗净的上等摩尼一般显得光亮。依方位,生于上方。依处所,立住于身内两乳之间。依界限,心以心之分为界限——这是它的同分界限。而异分界限则与头发相同。

193. Hadayanti hadayamaṃsaṃ. Taṃ vaṇṇato rattapadumapattapiṭṭhivaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato bāhirapattāni apanetvā adhomukhaṃ ṭhapitapadumamakuḷasaṇṭhānaṃ. Bahi maṭṭhaṃ, anto kosātakīphalassa abbhantarasadisaṃ. Paññavantānaṃ thokaṃ vikasitaṃ, mandapaññānaṃ makuḷitameva. Anto cassa punnāgaṭṭhipatiṭṭhānamatto āvāṭako hoti, yattha addhapasatamattaṃ lohitaṃ saṇṭhāti, yaṃ nissāya manodhātu ca manoviññāṇadhātu ca vattanti. Taṃ panetaṃ rāgacaritassa rattaṃ hoti, dosacaritassa kāḷakaṃ, mohacaritassa maṃsadhovanaudakasadisaṃ, vitakkacaritassa kulatthayūsavaṇṇaṃ, saddhācaritassa kaṇikārapupphavaṇṇaṃ, paññācaritassa acchaṃ vippasannaṃ anāvilaṃ paṇḍaraṃ parisuddhaṃ niddhotajātimaṇi viya jutimantaṃ khāyati. Disato uparimāya disāya jātaṃ. Okāsato sarīrabbhantare dvinnaṃ thanānaṃ majjhe patiṭṭhitaṃ. Paricchedato hadayaṃ hadayabhāgena paricchinnaṃ, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
194已对照

一百九十四、肝者:是成对的肉片。它依颜色是带着淡黄成分的红色,是不太红的拘物头(kumuda)花瓣背面的颜色。依形状,根部为一、末端成对,如拘鞞陀罗叶之形。而它在钝者[身上]只有一片,是大的;在有慧者[身上]则有两片或三片,是小的。依方位,生于上方;依处所,在两乳之内,依靠右侧而住。依界限,肝以肝之分为界限——这是它的同分界限。而异分界限则与头发相同。

194. Yakananti yamakamaṃsapaṭalaṃ. Taṃ vaṇṇato rattaṃ paṇḍukadhātukaṃ nātirattakumudassa pattapiṭṭhivaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato mūle ekaṃ agge yamakaṃ koviḷārapattasaṇṭhānaṃ. Tañca dandhānaṃ ekameva hoti mahantaṃ, paññavantānaṃ dve vā tīṇi vā khuddakāni. Disato uparimāya disāya jātaṃ, okāsato dvinnaṃ thanānaṃ abbhantare dakkhiṇapassaṃ nissāya ṭhitaṃ. Paricchedato yakanaṃ yakanabhāgena paricchinnaṃ, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
195缅 1.249已对照

一百九十五、肋膜者:是依覆蔽、不覆蔽之别而有两种的包覆之肉。它两种都依颜色是白色的,是都古拉细布碎片的颜色。依形状,是其自身处所的形状。依方位,覆蔽的肋膜[生]于上方,另一种生于两方。依处所,覆蔽的肋膜覆盖着心与肾,不覆蔽的肋膜在全身皮下包覆着肉而住。依界限,以下面的肉、上面的皮、横向以肋膜之分为界限——这是它的同分界限。而异分界限则与头发相同。

195. Kilomakanti paṭicchannāpaṭicchannabhedato duvidhaṃ pariyonahanamaṃsaṃ. Taṃ duvidhampi vaṇṇato setaṃ dukūlapilotikavaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato attano okāsasaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato paṭicchannakilomakaṃ uparimāya disāya. Itaraṃ dvīsu disāsu jātaṃ. Okāsato paṭicchannakilomakaṃ hadayañca vakkañca paṭicchādetvā, appaṭicchannakilomakaṃ sakalasarīre cammassa heṭṭhato maṃsaṃ pariyonandhitvā ṭhitaṃ. Paricchedato heṭṭhā maṃsena, upari cammena, tiriyaṃ kilomakabhāgena paricchinnaṃ, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
196已对照

一百九十六、脾者:是腹中舌状的肉。它依颜色是青色的,是黄荆(nigguṇḍi)花的颜色。依形状,约七指之量,不连系带,如黑牛犊的舌之形。依方位,生于上方。依处所,在心的左侧,依靠胃膜的顶侧而住;当它因兵器的击打而露出体外时,众生的生命便告终尽。依界限,以脾之分为界限——这是它的同分界限。而异分界限则与头发相同。

196. Pihakanti udarajivhāmaṃsaṃ. Taṃ vaṇṇato nīlaṃ nigguṇḍipupphavaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato sattaṅgulappamāṇaṃ abandhanaṃ kāḷavacchakajivhāsaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato uparimāya disāya jātaṃ. Okāsato hadayassa vāmapasse udarapaṭalassa matthakapassaṃ nissāya ṭhitaṃ, yasmiṃ paharaṇappahārena bahinikkhante sattānaṃ jīvitakkhayo hoti. Paricchedato pihakabhāgena paricchinnaṃ, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
197已对照

一百九十七、肺者:是分为三十二块肉片的肺肉。它依颜色是红色的,是不太熟的优昙婆罗果之色。依形状,如切得不齐的厚饼片之形。在里面,由于在没有所吃、所饮之物时,被升起的业生火之热所冲击,[它]如嚼过的稻草团一般,无味、无食素。依方位,生于上方。依处所,在身内两乳之间,从上覆盖着心与肝,垂挂而住。依界限,以肺之分为界限——这是它的同分界限。而异分界限则与头发相同。

197. Papphāsanti dvattiṃsamaṃsakhaṇḍappabhedaṃ papphāsamaṃsaṃ. Taṃ vaṇṇato rattaṃ nātipakkaudumbaraphalavaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato visamacchinnabahalapūvakhaṇḍasaṇṭhānaṃ. Abbhantare asitapītānaṃ abhāve uggatena kammajatejusmānā abbhāhatattā saṃkhāditapalālapiṇḍamiva nirasaṃ nirojaṃ. Disato uparimāya disāya jātaṃ. Okāsato sarīrabbhantare dvinnaṃ thanānaṃ antare hadayañca yakanañca upari chādetvā olambantaṃ ṭhitaṃ. Paricchedato papphāsabhāgena paricchinnaṃ, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
198已对照

一百九十八、肠者:是男子三十二肘、女子二十八肘、在二十一处弯折的肠管。它依颜色是白色的,是掺砂石灰之色。依形状,如砍去了头、盘曲着放在血槽中的蛇之形。依方位,生于两方。依处所,由于上面系于颈根、下面系于粪道,所以在身内以颈根与粪道为两端而住。依界限,以肠之分为界限——这是它的同分界限。而异分界限则与头发相同。

198. Antanti purisassa dvattiṃsahatthā itthiyā aṭṭhavīsatihatthā ekavīsatiyā ṭhānesu obhaggā antavaṭṭi. Tadetaṃ vaṇṇato setaṃ sakkharasudhāvaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato lohitadoṇiyaṃ ābhujitvā ṭhapitasīsacchinnasappasaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato dvīsu disāsu jātaṃ. Okāsato upari galavāṭake heṭṭhā ca karīsamagge vinibandhattā galavāṭakakarīsamaggapariyante sarīrabbhantare ṭhitaṃ. Paricchedato antabhāgena paricchinnaṃ, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
199缅 1.250已对照

一百九十九、肠间膜者:是诸肠曲之处的系带。它依颜色是白色的,是白睡莲(dakasītalika)根之色。依形状,也正是白睡莲根之形。依方位,生于两方。依处所,犹如拉动傀儡之时,傀儡的线把傀儡的诸木板[系在一起]一般,[它]把诸肠曲系在一起,令作锄、斧等活计的人的[诸肠曲]不滑落;又如在擦脚绳垫的圈环中间缝合起来的绳子一般,住于二十一个肠曲之间。依界限,以肠间膜之分为界限——这是它的同分界限。而异分界限则与头发相同。

199. Antaguṇanti antabhogaṭṭhānesu bandhanaṃ. Taṃ vaṇṇato setaṃ dakasītalikamūlavaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato dakasītalikamūlasaṇṭhānameva. Disato dvīsu disāsu jātaṃ. Okāsato kuddālapharasukammādīni karontānaṃ yantākaḍḍhanakāle yantasuttakamiva yantaphalakāni antabhoge ekato agaḷante ābandhitvā pādapuñchanarajjumaṇḍalakassa antarā saṃsibbitvā ṭhitarajjukā viya ekavīsatiyā antabhogānaṃ antarā ṭhitaṃ. Paricchedato antaguṇabhāgena paricchinnaṃ, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
200已对照

二百、胃中物者:是在胃中的所吃、所饮、所嚼、所尝之物。它依颜色是所吞食之食物的颜色。依形状,如松松地系在滤水布中的米之形。依方位,生于上方。依处所,住于胃中。

200. Udariyanti udare bhavaṃ asitapītakhāyitasāyitaṃ. Taṃ vaṇṇato ajjhohaṭāhāravaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato parissāvane sithilabaddhataṇḍulasaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato uparimāya disāya jātaṃ. Okāsato udare ṭhitaṃ.
缅 1.251已对照

所谓胃,是犹如两端被绞拧的湿布中间所生起的鼓包一般的肠膜,外面光滑,里面似裹过肉的秽渣的脏外衣的绒毛,也可以说似腐烂的波罗蜜果皮的内面;在那里,塔果吒迦(takkoṭaka)虫、蚯蚓、多罗髓虫、针口虫、布丝虫等等三十二族类之别的虫,纷乱扰攘、成群结队地游行而栖居;它们在没有饮食等时,便跳起号叫,冲撞心肉;在吞咽饮食等时,又仰起头来,急急忙忙地抢夺最先吞下的两三口;它是那些虫的产房、厕所、病房与冢间。在那里,犹如在旃陀罗村门口的污水坑中,于炎热时节天降大雨时,被水冲来的尿、粪、皮、骨、腱的碎块、唾、涕、血等种种尸秽之物落下,与泥水搅混,过了两三天便生出成群的虫,被日晒的热力蒸得腐烂,上面冒出泡沫与水泡,颜色深青,极其恶臭可憎,成为既不值得走近、也不值得一看的样子而住,更不必说去嗅或去尝了;正是如此,种种饮食等被牙齿之杵舂碎,被舌头之手翻转,被唾液涎沫粘裹,当下就失去了色、香、味等的美好,似织工的浆糊与狗的呕吐物,落下之后,被胆汁、痰、风所包裹,被胃火的热力蒸得腐烂,满是成群的虫,一层层地冒出泡沫与水泡,成为极其污秽、恶臭、可憎之状而住。仅仅听闻它,也会对饮食等生起不可意之感,更不必说以慧眼观察了。而落在那里的饮食等分为五分:一分被虫所吃,一分被胃火所烧,一分成为尿,一分[成为]粪,一分成为精汁而滋养血、肉等。

Udaraṃ nāma ubhato nippīḷiyamānassa allasāṭakassa majjhe sañjātaphoṭakasadisaṃ antapaṭalaṃ, bahi maṭṭhaṃ, anto maṃsakasambupaliveṭhanakiliṭṭhapāvārakapupphakasadisaṃ, kuthitapanasatacassa abbhantarasadisantipi vattuṃ vaṭṭati, yattha takkoṭakā gaṇḍuppādakā tālahīrakā sūcimukhakā paṭatantasuttakā iccevamādidvattiṃsakulappabhedā kimayo ākulabyākulā saṇḍasaṇḍacārino hutvā nivasanti, ye pānabhojanādimhi avijjamāne ullaṅghitvā viravantā hadayamaṃsaṃ abhihananti, pānabhojanādiajjhoharaṇavelāyañca uddhaṃmukhā hutvā paṭhamajjhohaṭe dve tayo ālope turitaturitā viluppanti, yaṃ tesaṃ kimīnaṃ sūtigharaṃ vaccakuṭi gilānasālā susānañca hoti. Yattha seyyathāpi nāma caṇḍālagāmadvāre candanikāya nidāghasamaye thūlaphusitake deve vassante udakena vuyhamānaṃ muttakarīsacammaaṭṭhinhārukhaṇḍakheḷasiṅghāṇikālohitappabhutinānākuṇapajātaṃ nipatitvā kaddamodakāluḷitaṃ dvīhatīhaccayena sañjātakimikulaṃ sūriyātapasantāpavegakuthitaṃ upari pheṇapupphuḷake muñcantaṃ abhinīlavaṇṇaṃ paramaduggandhajegucchaṃ neva upagantuṃ, na daṭṭhuṃ araharūpataṃ āpajjitvā tiṭṭhati, pageva ghāyituṃ vā sāyituṃ vā, evameva nānappakāraṃ pānabhojanādidantamusalasañcuṇṇitaṃ jivhāhatthaparivattitakheḷalālāpalibuddhaṃ taṅkhaṇavigatavaṇṇagandharasādisampadaṃ tantavāyakhalisuvānavamathusadisaṃ nipatitvā pittasemhavātapaliveṭhitaṃ hutvā udaraggisantāpavegakuthitaṃ kimikulākulaṃ uparūpari pheṇapupphuḷakāni muñcantaṃ paramakasambuduggandhajegucchabhāvaṃ āpajjitvā tiṭṭhati. Yaṃ sutvāpi pānabhojanādīsu amanuññatā saṇṭhāti, pageva paññācakkhunā avaloketvā. Yattha ca patitaṃ pānabhojanādi pañcadhā vivekaṃ gacchati, ekaṃ bhāgaṃ pāṇakā khādanti, ekaṃ bhāgaṃ udaraggi jhāpeti, eko bhāgo muttaṃ hoti, eko bhāgo karīsaṃ, eko bhāgo rasabhāvaṃ āpajjitvā soṇitamaṃsādīni upabrūhayati.
已对照

依界限,以胃膜与胃中物之分为界限,这是它的同分界限。而异分界限则与头发相同。

Paricchedato udarapaṭalena ceva udariyabhāgena ca paricchinnaṃ. Ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
201已对照

二百零一、粪者:即大便。它依颜色大多是所吞食之食物的颜色。依形状,是其处所的形状。依方位,生于下方。依处所,住于熟藏中。所谓熟藏,是在脐下与脊骨根之间、肠的末端,高约八指,似竹管;在那里,犹如落在高处地面的雨水向下渗流,充满低处地面而住,正是如此,凡落入生藏中的饮食等,被胃火一再煮得冒泡而熟,如在磨石上研过一般成为细软之状,顺着肠道一再渗流而下,被压紧,如塞进竹节中的黄泥一般积聚而住。依界限,以熟藏膜与粪之分为界限——这是它的同分界限。而异分界限则与头发相同。

201. Karīsanti vaccaṃ. Taṃ vaṇṇato yebhuyyena ajjhohaṭāhāravaṇṇameva hoti. Saṇṭhānato okāsasaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato heṭṭhimāya disāya jātaṃ. Okāsato pakkāsaye ṭhitaṃ. Pakkāsayo nāma heṭṭhānābhi-piṭṭhikaṇṭakamūlānaṃ antare antāvasāne ubbedhena aṭṭhaṅgulamatto veḷunāḷikasadiso, yattha seyyathāpi nāma upari bhūmibhāge patitaṃ vassodakaṃ ogaḷitvā heṭṭhā bhūmibhāgaṃ pūretvā tiṭṭhati, evameva yaṃkiñci āmāsaye patitaṃ pānabhojanādikaṃ udaragginā pheṇuddehakaṃ pakkaṃ pakkaṃ nisadāya pisitamiva saṇhabhāvaṃ āpajjitvā antabilena ogaḷitvā ogaḷitvā omadditvā veḷupabbe pakkhipamānapaṇḍumattikā viya sannicitaṃ hutvā tiṭṭhati. Paricchedato pakkāsayapaṭalena ceva karīsabhāgena ca paricchinnaṃ, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
202缅 1.252已对照

二百零二、脑者:是在头颅内的髓之堆。它依颜色是白色的,是菌蕈团的颜色;也可以说是尚未成为凝乳的变质乳汁之色。依形状,是其处所的形状。依方位,生于上方。依处所,在头颅内,沿着四条缝合线,犹如合放在一起的四个面团一般聚合而住。依界限,以头颅的内壁与脑之分为界限——这是它的同分界限。而异分界限则与头发相同。

202. Matthaluṅganti sīsakaṭāhabbhantare ṭhitamiñjarāsi. Taṃ vaṇṇato setaṃ ahicchattakapiṇḍavaṇṇaṃ. Dadhibhāvaṃ asampattaṃ duṭṭhakhīravaṇṇantipi vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Saṇṭhānato okāsasaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato uparimāya disāya jātaṃ. Okāsato sīsakaṭāhabbhantare cattāro sibbinimagge nissāya samodhānetvā ṭhapitā cattāro piṭṭhapiṇḍā viya samohitaṃ tiṭṭhati. Paricchedato sīsakaṭāhassa abbhantaratalehi ceva matthaluṅgabhāgena ca paricchinnaṃ, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
203已对照

二百零三、胆汁者:胆汁有两种,即固着胆汁与不固着胆汁。此中,固着胆汁依颜色是浓稠的摩头迦油之色;不固着胆汁是枯萎的阿姑离(ākuli)花之色。依形状,两者都是其处所的形状。依方位,固着胆汁生于上方,另一种生于两方。依处所,不固着胆汁除了头发、体毛、牙齿、指甲的无肉之处以及坚硬干燥的皮之外,如水上的油滴一般遍布其余的身体而住;当它紊乱时,眼睛变黄、旋转,身体颤抖、发痒。固着胆汁住于胆囊中——那胆囊在心与肺之间,依附肝肉而立住,似大丝瓜的瓜囊;当它紊乱时,众生便成为发狂者,心颠倒,舍弃惭愧,作不应作的,说不应说的,想不应想的。依界限,以胆汁之分为界限——这是它的同分界限。而异分界限则与头发相同。

203. Pittanti dve pittāni baddhapittañca abaddhapittañca. Tattha baddhapittaṃ vaṇṇato bahalamadhukatelavaṇṇaṃ. Abaddhapittaṃ milātaākulipupphavaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato ubhayampi okāsasaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato baddhapittaṃ uparimāya disāya jātaṃ, itaraṃ dvīsu disāsu jātaṃ. Okāsato abaddhapittaṃ ṭhapetvā kesalomadantanakhānaṃ maṃsavinimuttaṭṭhānañceva thaddhasukkhacammañca udakamiva telabindu avasesasarīraṃ byāpetvā ṭhitaṃ, yamhi kupite akkhīni pītakāni honti, bhamanti, gattaṃ kampati, kaṇḍūyati. Baddhapittaṃ hadayapapphāsānaṃ antare yakanamaṃsaṃ nissāya patiṭṭhite mahākosātakīkosakasadise pittakosake ṭhitaṃ, yamhi kupite sattā ummattakā honti, vipallatthacittā hirottappaṃ chaḍḍetvā akātabbaṃ karonti, abhāsitabbaṃ bhāsanti, acintitabbaṃ cintenti. Paricchedato pittabhāgena paricchinnaṃ, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
204已对照

二百零四、痰者:是身内满一钵他(pattha)之量的痰。它依颜色是白色的,是那伽跋拉(nāgabalā)叶汁之色。依形状,是其处所的形状。依方位,生于上方。依处所,住于胃膜上。它在吞咽饮食等之时,犹如水中的水苔浮萍,当木片或瓦片落下时,被切开分为两边,又再覆盖[回来]而住;正是如此,在饮食等落下时,[它]被切开分为两边,又再覆盖[回来]而住。当它减弱时,胃如熟透的疮、如腐坏的鸡蛋一般,成为极可憎、有尸臭的;由从那里升起的气味,嗳气与口也成为恶臭的,似腐烂的尸体;那人便落到应被说「走开,你散发着恶臭」的地步。而当它增长而成为浓厚时,便如厕所的盖板一般,把尸臭封闭在胃膜之内而住。依界限,以痰之分为界限——这是它的同分界限。而异分界限则与头发相同。

204. Semhanti sarīrabbhantare ekapatthapūrappamāṇaṃ semhaṃ. Taṃ vaṇṇato setaṃ nāgabalāpaṇṇarasavaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato okāsasaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato uparimāya disāya jātaṃ. Okāsato udarapaṭale ṭhitaṃ. Yaṃ pānabhojanādiajjhoharaṇakāle seyyathāpi nāma udake sevālapaṇakaṃ kaṭṭhe vā kathale vā patante chijjitvā dvidhā hutvā puna ajjhottharitvā tiṭṭhati, evameva pānabhojanādimhi nipatante chijjitvā dvidhā hutvā puna ajjhottharitvā tiṭṭhati, yamhi ca mandībhūte pakkagaṇḍo viya pūtikukkuṭaṇḍamiva ca udaraṃ paramajegucchaṃ kuṇapagandhaṃ hoti, tato uggatena ca gandhena uddekopi mukhampi duggandhaṃ pūtikuṇapasadisaṃ hoti. So ca puriso apehi duggandhaṃ vāyasīti vattabbataṃ āpajjati, yañca vaḍḍhitvā bahalattamāpannaṃ pidhānaphalakamiva vaccakuṭiyaṃ udarapaṭalassa abbhantareyeva kuṇapagandhaṃ sannirumbhitvā tiṭṭhati. Paricchedato semhabhāgena paricchinnaṃ, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
205缅 1.253已对照

二百零五、脓者:是依腐坏的血而转起的脓。它依颜色是枯黄叶之色;而在死尸中,是腐坏的浓稠米汤之色。依形状,是其处所的形状。依方位,存在于两方。依处所,脓没有它能积聚而住的固定处所;凡身体的某处被树桩、荆棘、兵器、火焰等所伤,血在那里凝结而化脓,或者生起疮、疖等,[脓]就在那些地方而住。依界限,以脓之分为界限——这是它的同分界限。而异分界限则与头发相同。

205. Pubboti pūtilohitavasena pavattapubbaṃ. Taṃ vaṇṇato paṇḍupalāsavaṇṇo. Matasarīre pana pūtibahalācāmavaṇṇo hoti. Saṇṭhānato okāsasaṇṭhāno. Disato dvīsu disāsu hoti. Okāsato pana pubbassa okāso nāma nibaddho natthi, yattha so sannicito tiṭṭheyya, yatra yatra khāṇukaṇṭakapaharaṇaggijālādīhi abhihate sarīrappadese lohitaṃ saṇṭhahitvā paccati, gaṇḍapīḷakādayo vā uppajjanti, tatra tatra tiṭṭhati. Paricchedato pubbabhāgena paricchinno, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
206已对照

二百零六、血者:血有两种,即积聚的血与流动的血。此中,积聚的血依颜色是熬过的浓稠紫胶汁之色;流动的血是清澈的紫胶汁之色。依形状,两者都是其处所的形状。依方位,积聚的血生于上方,另一种生于两方。依处所,流动的血除了头发、体毛、牙齿、指甲的无肉之处以及坚硬干燥的皮之外,顺着脉管之网遍布一切执受的身体而住。积聚的血充满肝所在之处的下部,满一钵他之量,一点一点地滴在心、肾、肺之上,润湿着肾、心、肝、肺而住;因为当它不润湿肾、心等时,众生便口渴。依界限,以血之分为界限——这是它的同分界限。而异分界限则与头发相同。

206. Lohitanti dve lohitāni sannicitalohitañca saṃsaraṇalohitañca. Tattha sannicitalohitaṃ vaṇṇato nipakkabahalalākhārasavaṇṇaṃ. Saṃsaraṇalohitaṃ acchalākhārasavaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato ubhayampi okāsasaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato sannicitalohitaṃ uparimāya disāya jātaṃ. Itaraṃ dvisu disāsu jātaṃ. Okāsato saṃsaraṇalohitaṃ ṭhapetvā kesalomadantanakhānaṃ maṃsavinimuttaṭṭhānañceva thaddhasukkhacammañca dhamanijālānusārena sabbaṃ upādiṇṇasarīraṃ pharitvā ṭhitaṃ. Sannicitalohitaṃ yakanaṭṭhānassa heṭṭhābhāgaṃ pūretvā ekapatthapūramattaṃ hadayavakkapapphāsānaṃ upari thokaṃ thokaṃ paggharantaṃ vakkahadayayakanapapphāse temayamānaṃ ṭhitaṃ. Tasmiṃ hi vakkahadayādīni atemente sattā pipāsitā honti. Paricchedato lohitabhāgena paricchinnaṃ, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
207缅 1.254已对照

二百零七、汗者:是从毛孔等处流出的水界。它依颜色是清澈的芝麻油之色。依形状,是其处所的形状。依方位,生于两方。依处所,汗没有固定的处所,[使]它能如血一般常时而住;而当身体因火的炙热、日的炙热、时节的变化等而发热时,它便如刚从水中拔出的、断口不齐的一束莲藕、莲茎、拘物头茎一般,从一切发孔、毛孔的孔口流出;所以它的形状也应依发孔、毛孔的孔口而知。而把握汗的瑜伽者,应正就[汗]充满发孔、毛孔的孔口而住[之状]来作意汗。依界限,以汗之分为界限——这是它的同分界限。而异分界限则与头发相同。

207. Sedoti lomakūpādīhi paggharaṇakaāpodhātu. So vaṇṇato vippasannatilatelavaṇṇo. Saṇṭhānato okāsasaṇṭhāno. Disato dvīsu disāsu jāto. Okāsato sedassokāso nāma nibaddho natthi, yattha so lohitaṃ viya sadā tiṭṭheyya. Yadā pana aggisantāpasūriyasantāpautuvikārādīhi sarīraṃ santapati, tadā udakato abbūḷhamattavisamacchinnabhisamuḷālakumudanāḷakalāpo viya sabbakesalomakūpavivarehi paggharati, tasmā tassa saṇṭhānampi kesalomakūpavivarānaññeva vasena veditabbaṃ. Sedapariggaṇhakena ca yoginā kesalomakūpavivare pūretvā ṭhitavaseneva sedo manasi kātabbo. Paricchedato sedabhāgena paricchinno, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
已对照

脂肪者:是凝固的油脂。它依颜色是切开的郁金之色。依形状,首先,在胖身者[身上],如放在皮与肉之间的郁金色都古拉细布碎片之形;在瘦身者[身上],依附于小腿肉、大腿肉、依附脊骨的背肉、腹围之肉——依附于这些,如折成两叠、三叠放着的郁金色都古拉细布碎片之形。依方位,生于两方。依处所,在胖者[身上]遍布全身,在瘦者[身上]依附小腿肉等而住;它虽也算作油脂,但由于极可憎,[人们]既不取它作头油,也不取它作鼻油等用。依界限,以下面的肉、上面的皮、横向以脂肪之分为界限——这是它的同分界限。而异分界限则与头发相同。

Medoti thinasineho. So vaṇṇato phālitahaliddivaṇṇo. Saṇṭhānato thūlasarīrassa tāva cammamaṃsantare ṭhapitahaliddivaṇṇadukūlapilotikasaṇṭhāno hoti. Kisasarīrassa jaṅghamaṃsaṃ ūrumaṃsaṃ piṭṭhikaṇṭakanissitaṃ piṭṭhimaṃsaṃ udaravaṭṭimaṃsanti etāni nissāya diguṇatiguṇaṃ katvā ṭhapitahaliddivaṇṇadukūlapilotikasaṇṭhāno. Disato dvīsu disāsu jāto. Okāsato thūlassa sakalasarīraṃ pharitvā kisassa jaṅghamaṃsādīni nissāya ṭhito, yaṃ sinehasaṅkhaṃ gatampi paramajegucchattā neva muddhani telatthāya, na nāsatelādīnamatthāya gaṇhanti. Paricchedato heṭṭhā maṃsena, upari cammena, tiriyaṃ medabhāgena paricchinno, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
208已对照

二百零八、泪者:是从眼中流出的水界。它依颜色是清澈的芝麻油之色。依形状,是其处所的形状。依方位,生于上方。依处所,住于眼窝中。而它并不如胆汁之于胆囊那样,常时积聚在眼窝中而住;而是当众生生起喜悦而放声大笑,生起忧而哭泣、悲叹,或吃了那样的不调之食,以及当他们的眼睛被烟、尘、土等所侵扰时,那时它便由这些喜悦、忧、不相宜的食物与时节而等起,充满眼窝而住,或者流出。而把握泪的瑜伽者,应正就[泪]充满眼窝而住[之状]来把握。依界限,以泪之分为界限——这是它的同分界限。而异分界限则与头发相同。

208. Assūti akkhīhi paggharaṇakaāpodhātu. Taṃ vaṇṇato vippasannatilatelavaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato okāsasaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato uparimāya disāya jātaṃ. Okāsato akkhikūpakesu ṭhitaṃ. Na cetaṃ pittakosake pittamiva akkhikūpakesu sadā sannicitaṃ tiṭṭhati. Yadā pana sattā somanassajātā mahāhasitaṃ hasanti, domanassajātā rodanti paridevanti, tathārūpaṃ vā visamāhāraṃ āhārenti, yadā ca nesaṃ akkhīni dhūmarajapaṃsukādīhi abhihaññanti. Tadā etehi somanassadomanassavisabhāgāhārautūhi samuṭṭhahitvā akkhikūpake pūretvā tiṭṭhati vā paggharati vā. Assupariggaṇhakena ca yoginā akkhikūpake pūretvā ṭhitavaseneva pariggaṇhitabbaṃ. Paricchedato assubhāgena paricchinnaṃ, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
209缅 1.255已对照

二百零九、膏者:是融化的油脂。它依颜色是椰子油之色;也可以说是洒在米汤上的油之色。依形状,如沐浴时在清水上面四处漂转的油滴散开之形。依方位,生于两方。依处所,大多住于手掌、手背、脚掌、脚背、鼻翼、额、肩头。而它并不常时在这些处所融化而住;而是当这些部位因火的炙热、日的炙热、时节不相宜、诸界不相宜而发热时,它便如沐浴时清水上散开的油滴一般,在那里此处彼处流动。依界限,以膏之分为界限——这是它的同分界限。而异分界限则与头发相同。

209. Vasāti vilīnasineho. Sā vaṇṇato nāḷikeratelavaṇṇā. Ācāme āsittatelavaṇṇātipi vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Saṇṭhānato nhānakāle pasannaudakassa upari paribbhamantasinehabinduvisaṭasaṇṭhānā. Disato dvīsu disāsu jātā. Okāsato yebhuyyena hatthatalahatthapiṭṭhipādatalapādapiṭṭhināsapuṭanalāṭaaṃsakūṭesu ṭhitā. Na cesā etesu okāsesu sadā vilīnāva hutvā tiṭṭhati. Yadā pana aggisantāpasūriyasantāpautuvisabhāgadhātuvisabhāgehi te padesā usmājātā honti, tadā tattha nhānakāle pasannaudakūpari sinehabinduvisaṭo viya ito cito ca sañcarati. Paricchedato vasābhāgena paricchinnā, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
210已对照

二百一十、唾者:是口内混有泡沫的水界。它依颜色是白色的,是泡沫之色。依形状,是其处所的形状;也可以说是泡沫之形。依方位,生于上方。依处所,从两颊的内侧下来,住于舌上。而它并不常时积聚在这里而住;而是当众生看见或忆起那样的食物,或把热、苦、辣、咸、酸的任何东西放入口中,或当他们心中不适,或对某物生起嫌恶时,那时唾便生起,从两颊的内侧下来,留在舌上。它在舌尖是稀的,在舌根是稠的;放入口中的米片、米粒或其他任何可嚼之物,它都能润湿,如在河岸沙洲上挖出的小坑中的水一般,不会耗尽。依界限,以唾之分为界限——这是它的同分界限。而异分界限则与头发相同。

210. Kheḷoti antomukhe pheṇamissā āpodhātu. So vaṇṇato seto pheṇavaṇṇo. Saṇṭhānato okāsasaṇṭhāno. Pheṇasaṇṭhānotipi vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Disato uparimāya disāya jāto. Okāsato ubhohi kapolapassehi oruyha jivhāya ṭhito. Na cesa ettha sadā sannicito hutvā tiṭṭhati. Yadā pana sattā tathārūpamāhāraṃ passanti vā saranti vā, uṇhatittakaṭukaloṇambilānaṃ vā kiñci mukhe ṭhapenti, yadā vā nesaṃ hadayaṃ āgilāyati, kismiñci deva vā jigucchā uppajjati, tadā kheḷo uppajjitvā ubhohi kapolapassehi oruyha jivhāya saṇṭhāti. Aggajivhāya cesa tanuko hoti, mūlajivhāya bahalo, mukhe pakkhittañca puthukaṃ vā taṇḍulaṃ vā aññaṃ vā kiñci khādanīyaṃ nadīpuline khatakūpakasalilaṃ viya parikkhayaṃ agacchantova temetuṃ samattho hoti. Paricchedato kheḷabhāgena paricchinno, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
211已对照

二百一十一、涕者:是从脑流出的不净物。它依颜色是嫩多罗果核之仁的颜色。依形状,是其处所的形状。依方位,生于上方。依处所,充满鼻孔而住。而它并不常时积聚在这里而住;而是犹如有人把凝乳包在莲叶中,在下面以刺刺穿,于是凝乳之汁便从那孔漏出而落在外面;正是如此,当众生哭泣,或依不相宜的食物与时节而诸界扰乱生起时,那时头内已成为腐坏之痰的脑便漏出,从上颚顶部的孔道下降,充满鼻孔而住,或者流出。而把握涕的瑜伽者,应正就[涕]充满鼻孔而住[之状]来把握。依界限,以涕之分为界限——这是它的同分界限。而异分界限则与头发相同。

211. Siṅghāṇikāti matthaluṅgato paggharaṇakaasuci. Sā vaṇṇato taruṇatālaṭṭhimiñjavaṇṇā. Saṇṭhānato okāsasaṇṭhānā. Disato uparimāya disāya jātā. Okāsato nāsāpuṭe pūretvā ṭhitā. Na cesā ettha sadā sannicitā hutvā tiṭṭhati, atha kho yathā nāma puriso paduminipatte dadhiṃ bandhitvā heṭṭhā kaṇṭakena vijjheyya, athānena chiddena dadhimuttaṃ gaḷitvā bahi pateyya, evameva yadā sattā rodanti, visabhāgāhārautuvasena vā sañjātadhātukhobhā honti, tadā anto sīsato pūtisemhabhāvamāpannaṃ matthaluṅgaṃ gaḷitvā tālumatthakavivarena otaritvā nāsāpuṭe pūretvā tiṭṭhati vā paggharati vā. Siṅghāṇikā pariggaṇhakena ca yoginā nāsāpuṭe pūretvā ṭhitavaseneva pariggaṇhitabbā. Paricchedato siṅghāṇikābhāgena paricchinnā, ayamassā sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
212缅 1.256已对照

二百一十二、关节滑液者:是身体诸关节之内的黏滑尸秽。它依颜色是迦尼迦罗树胶之色。依形状,是其处所的形状。依方位,生于两方。依处所,成办润滑诸骨节的作用,住于一百八十个关节之内。而凡是它少的人,当他起立、坐下、前进、后退、屈、伸时,骨头咯咯作响,[他]走动时如同发出弹指之声;走了一由旬、两由旬之远的路,风界便紊乱,肢体便疼痛。而凡是它多的人,在起立、坐下等时骨头不咯咯作响,即使走了长远的路,风界也不紊乱,肢体也不疼痛。依界限,以关节滑液之分为界限——这是它的同分界限。而异分界限则与头发相同。

212. Lasikāti sarīrasandhīnaṃ abbhantare picchilakuṇapaṃ. Sā vaṇṇato kaṇikāraniyyāsavaṇṇā. Saṇṭhānato okāsasaṇṭhānā. Disato dvīsu disāsu jātā. Okāsato aṭṭhisandhīnaṃ abbhañjanakiccaṃ sādhayamānā asītisatasandhīnaṃ abbhantare ṭhitā. Yassa cesā mandā hoti, tassa uṭṭhahantassa nisīdantassa abhikkamantassa paṭikkamantassa samiñjantassa pasārentassa aṭṭhikāni kaṭakaṭāyanti, accharāsaddaṃ karonto viya sañcarati. Ekayojanadviyojanamattaṃ addhānaṃ gatassa vāyodhātu kuppati, gattāni dukkhanti. Yassa pana bahukā honti, tassa uṭṭhānanisajjādīsu na aṭṭhīni kaṭakaṭāyanti, dīghampi addhānaṃ gatassa na vāyodhātu kuppati, na gattāni dukkhanti. Paricchedato lasikābhāgena paricchinnā, ayamassā sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
213已对照

二百一十三、尿者:即尿液。它依颜色是豆灰水之色。依形状,如口朝下放置的水瓮内所盛之水的形状。依方位,生于下方。依处所,住于膀胱之内。所谓膀胱,是称为膀胱囊[的东西]。在那里,犹如把无口的渗水瓮放入污水坑中,污水坑的汁液便渗入[瓮中],而它的入路却看不出来;正是如此,尿从身体渗入[膀胱],而它的入路看不出来,出路却是明显的。而当它充满了尿时,众生便有「我们要小便」的努力。依界限,以膀胱之内与尿之分为界限——这是它的同分界限。而异分界限则与头发相同。

213. Muttanti muttarasaṃ. Taṃ vaṇṇato māsakhārodakavaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato adhomukhaṭṭhapitaudakakumbhaabbhantaragataudakasaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato heṭṭhimāya disāya jātaṃ. Okāsato vatthissa abbhantare ṭhitaṃ. Vatthi nāma vatthi puṭo vuccati. Yattha seyyathāpi candanikāya pakkhitte amukhe ravaṇaghaṭe candanikāraso pavisati, na cassa pavisanamaggo paññāyati, evameva sarīrato muttaṃ pavisati, na cassa pavisanamaggo paññāyati, nikkhamanamaggo pana pākaṭo hoti. Yamhi ca muttassa bharite passāvaṃ karomāti sattānaṃ āyūhanaṃ hoti. Paricchedato vatthiabbhantarena ceva muttabhāgena ca paricchinnaṃ, ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
214缅 1.257已对照

二百一十四、如是,依颜色、形状、方位、处所、界限辨定了头发等诸部分之后,依「依次第、不太快」等方法,依颜色、形状、气味、所依、处所以五种[方式]作意「厌恶、厌恶」者,在超越施设之终,犹如有眼之人观看以一根线串起的三十二种颜色之花的花鬘时,一切花都如不分先后地显现,正是如此,当他以「在这身中有头发」等[方式]观察这身体时,那一切法都不分先后地显现。因此在作意善巧之论中说:「因为对初学者来说,当他作意『头发』时,作意便前行,直到触及『尿』这最后的部分才停住。」

而如果他也把作意引向外部,那么在一切部分都如是显现之后,四处游走的人、畜生等便舍去了众生的形相,唯以部分之堆[的样子]现起;被他们吞咽的饮食等,也如同被投入部分之堆中一般现起。

于是,当他依次第舍弃等[方式]一再作意「厌恶、厌恶」时,安止便次第生起。此中,头发等依颜色、形状、方位、处所、界限而现起,是取相;依一切行相以厌恶而现起,是似相。当他习行它、修习它时,依所说的方式,如在诸不净业处中一样,唯以初禅[之相]生起安止。

凡只有一个部分显现的人,或者在一个部分上得到安止之后,不再于另一[部分]上致力的人,对他只生起一个[初禅]。而凡有多个部分显现的人,或者在一个[部分]上得到禅那之后,又于另一[部分]上也致力的人,对他则如末罗迦长老那样,依部分的数目生起诸初禅。

相传,那位具寿握着长部诵者阿跋亚长老的手,说了「贤友阿跋亚,你且学取这个问题」之后,说道:「末罗迦长老是于三十二部分中的三十二初禅之得者。他若夜里入一[禅]、白天入一[禅],要过半月有余才再[轮]到;而若每天入一[禅],要过一月有余才再[轮]到。」

这业处虽是如是依初禅而成就,然而由于是依念之力在颜色、形状等上成就,所以称为「身至念」。

而勤修这身至念的比丘,是堪忍不乐与乐者,不乐不能胜他,他一再地制胜已生的不乐而住;是堪忍怖畏与惊骇者,怖畏与惊骇不能胜他,他一再地制胜已生的怖畏与惊骇而住;他能忍寒、热……乃至……成为能忍受夺命的[诸受]者(《中部》3.159)。依于头发等的颜色之别,他成为四禅之得者。他通达六神通(《中部》3.159)。

因此,智者确实应当不放逸地勤修

这如是具众多功德利益的身至念。

这是关于身至念的详说之门。

214. Evañhi kesādike koṭṭhāse vaṇṇasaṇṭhānadisokāsaparicchedavasena vavatthapetvā anupubbato nātisīghatotiādinā nayena vaṇṇasaṇṭhānagandhāsayokāsavasena pañcadhā paṭikkūlā paṭikkūlāti manasikaroto paṇṇattisamatikkamāvasāne seyyathāpi cakkhumato purisassa dvattiṃsavaṇṇānaṃ kusumānaṃ ekasuttakaganthitaṃ mālaṃ olokentassa sabbapupphāni apubbāpariyamiva pākaṭāni honti, evameva atthi imasmiṃ kāye kesāti imaṃ kāyaṃ olokentassa sabbe te dhammā apubbāpariyāva pākaṭā honti. Tena vuttaṃ manasikārakosallakathāyaṃ ‘‘ādikammikassa hi kesāti manasikaroto manasikāro gantvā muttanti imaṃ pariyosānakoṭṭhāsameva āhacca tiṭṭhatī’’ti.
Sace pana bahiddhāpi manasikāraṃ upasaṃharati, athassa evaṃ sabbakoṭṭhāsesu pākaṭībhūtesu āhiṇḍantā manussatiracchānādayo sattākāraṃ vijahitvā koṭṭhāsarāsivaseneva upaṭṭhahanti, tehi ca ajjhohariyamānaṃ pānabhojanādi koṭṭhāsarāsimhi pakkhipamānamiva upaṭṭhāti.
Athassa anupubbamuñcanādivasena paṭikkūlā paṭikkūlāti punappunaṃ manasikaroto anukkamena appanā uppajjati. Tattha kesādīnaṃ vaṇṇasaṇṭhānadisokāsaparicchedavasena upaṭṭhānaṃ uggahanimittaṃ. Sabbākārato paṭikkūlavasena upaṭṭhānaṃ paṭibhāganimittaṃ. Taṃ āsevato bhāvayato vuttanayena asubhakammaṭṭhānesu viya paṭhamajjhānavaseneva appanā uppajjati.
Sā yassa ekova koṭṭhāso pākaṭo hoti, ekasmiṃ vā koṭṭhāse appanaṃ patvā puna aññasmiṃ yogaṃ na karoti, tassa ekāva uppajjati. Yassa pana aneke koṭṭhāsā pākaṭā honti, ekasmiṃ vā jhānaṃ patvā puna aññasmiṃpi yogaṃ karoti, tassa mallakattherassa viya koṭṭhāsagaṇanāya paṭhamajjhānāni nibbattanti.
So kirāyasmā dīghabhāṇakaabhayattheraṃ hatthe gahetvā ‘‘āvuso abhaya, imaṃ tāva pañhaṃ uggaṇhāhī’’ti vatvā āha – ‘‘mallakatthero dvattiṃsakoṭṭhāsesu dvattiṃsāya paṭhamajjhānānaṃ lābhī. Sace rattiṃ ekaṃ, divā ekaṃ samāpajjati, atirekaddhamāsena puna sampajjati, sace pana devasikaṃ ekaṃ samāpajjati, atirekamāsena puna sampajjatī’’ti.
Evaṃ paṭhamajjhānavasena ijjhamānampi cetaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ vaṇṇasaṇṭhānādīsu satibalena ijjhanato kāyagatāsatīti vuccati.
Imañca kāyagatāsatimanuyutto bhikkhu aratiratisaho hoti, na ca naṃ arati sahati, uppannaṃ aratiṃ abhibhuyya abhibhuyya viharati. Bhayabheravasaho hoti, na ca naṃ bhayabheravaṃ sahati, uppannaṃ bhayabheravaṃ abhibhuyya abhibhuyya viharati. Khamo hoti sītassa uṇhassa …pe… pāṇaharānaṃ adhivāsakajātiko hoti (ma. ni. 3.159). Kesādīnaṃ vaṇṇabhedaṃ nissāya catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ lābhī hoti. Cha abhiññā paṭivijjhati (ma. ni. 3.159).
Tasmā have appamatto, anuyuñjetha paṇḍito;
Evaṃ anekānisaṃsaṃ, imaṃ kāyagatāsatinti.
Idaṃ kāyagatāsatiyaṃ vitthārakathāmukhaṃ.
已对照

入出息念论

Ānāpānassatikathā
215已对照

二百一十五、现在,世尊以「诸比丘,这入出息念定也[是这样]:若修习、多作,正是寂静的、殊胜的、无浇灌的、乐的住,并且立即使一再生起的恶不善法消失、平息」如是称赞之后——

「诸比丘,入出息念定如何修习、如何多作,正是寂静的、殊胜的、无浇灌的、乐的住,并且立即使一再生起的恶不善法消失、平息呢?诸比丘,在此,比丘前往林野、或前往树下、或前往空闲处,结跏趺而坐,保持其身正直,使念现起于面前。他只是具念地入息,具念地出息。入息长时,了知『我入息长』;出息长时……乃至……入息短时……乃至……出息短时,了知『我出息短』。他学:『我将觉知全身而入息』;他学:『我将觉知全身而出息』。他学:『我将令身行止息而入息』;他学:『我将令身行止息而出息』。觉知喜……觉知乐……觉知心行……令心行止息……觉知心……令心喜悦……令心得定……令心解脱……随观无常……随观离贪……随观灭。他学:『我将随观舍离而入息』;他学:『我将随观舍离而出息』。」——

如是所开示的具十六事的入出息念业处,它的修习之法[现在]已轮到了。而由于那[修习之法]唯有随顺圣典的释义而说,才得一切行相圆满,因此,此中[所作]的是以圣典释义为前导的解说。

215. Idāni yaṃ taṃ bhagavatā ‘‘ayampi kho, bhikkhave, ānāpānassatisamādhi bhāvito bahulīkato santo ceva paṇīto ca asecanako ca sukho ca vihāro, uppannuppanne ca pāpake akusale dhamme ṭhānaso antaradhāpeti vūpasametī’’ti evaṃ pasaṃsitvā –
216缅 1.259已对照

二百一十六、首先,在「诸比丘,入出息念定如何修习」这里,「如何(kathaṃ)」是想要以种种方式详说入出息念定的修习而[作]的问。「诸比丘,入出息念定……修习(bhāvito ca bhikkhave ānāpānassatisamādhi)」,是由想要以种种方式详说而对所问之法的指示。于「如何多作……乃至……平息(kathaṃ bahulīkato…pe… vūpasameti)」这里,也是这个方法。此中,「修习(bhāvito)」者:即令生起、或令增长。「入出息念定(ānāpānassatisamādhi)」者:与摄取入出息的念相应的定。或在入出息念中的定,[即]入出息念定。「多作(bahulīkato)」者:即一再地作。「正是寂静的、殊胜的(santo ceva paṇīto ca)」者:即正是寂静的,也正是殊胜的。于两处都应知以「正(eva)」字作限定。这说的是什么?因为这[入出息念定]并不像不净业处那样——[不净业处]唯依通达而是寂静的、殊胜的,然而由于所缘粗显、由于所缘可厌,就所缘而言既不寂静,也不殊胜——[它]不以任何理趣而是不寂静的或不殊胜的;而是由于所缘的寂静性,它也是寂静的、平息的、寂灭的;由于称为通达的支的寂静性,也[是寂静的]。由于所缘的殊胜性,它也是殊胜的、不令生厌足的;由于支的殊胜性,也[是殊胜的]。因此说「正是寂静的、殊胜的」。

而在「无浇灌的、乐的住(asecanako ca sukho ca vihāro)」这里,它没有浇灌,故为「无浇灌的」;即未被浇洒的、不混杂的、各别的、独有的。此中没有由遍作或近行而来的寂静性,而是从最初的注意起,便以自己的自性而是寂静的、殊胜的,此是其义。而某些[师]说:「无浇灌的」即未被浇洒的、有滋养素的、以自性而为甘美的。如是应知,这[入出息念定]是无浇灌的;并且由于在每一安止刹那都导向获得身的与心的乐,[故]是乐的住。「一再生起的(uppannuppanne)」者:即一一未被镇伏的。「恶(pāpake)」者:即低劣的。「不善法(akusale dhamme)」者:即由不善巧所生的诸法。「立即使……消失(ṭhānaso antaradhāpeti)」者:即于刹那间使[它们]消失、镇伏。「平息(vūpasameti)」者:即善加平息。或者,是说由于是决择分的,依次达到圣道的增长时,便正断[它们],令[它们]安息。

而此中简要之义为:诸比丘,入出息念定以什么方式、以什么行相、以什么方法修习,以什么方式多作,正是寂静的……乃至……平息?

‘‘Kathaṃ bhāvito ca, bhikkhave, ānāpānassatisamādhi kathaṃ bahulīkato santo ceva paṇīto ca asecanako ca sukho ca vihāro, uppannuppanne ca pāpake akusale dhamme ṭhānaso antaradhāpeti vūpasameti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu araññagato vā rukkhamūlagato vā suññāgāragato vā nisīdati pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā ujuṃ kāyaṃ paṇidhāya parimukhaṃ satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvā, so satova assasati sato passasati. Dīghaṃ vā assasanto dīghaṃ assasāmīti pajānāti. Dīghaṃ vā passasanto…pe… rassaṃ vā assasanto…pe… rassaṃ vā passasanto rassaṃ passasāmīti pajānāti. Sabbakāyapaṭisaṃvedī assasissāmīti sikkhati. Sabbakāyapaṭisaṃvedī passasissāmīti sikkhati. Passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ assasissāmīti sikkhati. Passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ passasissāmīti sikkhati. Pītipaṭisaṃvedī… sukhapaṭisaṃvedī… cittasaṅkhārapaṭisaṃvedī… passambhayaṃ cittasaṅkhāraṃ… cittapaṭisaṃvedī… abhippamodayaṃ cittaṃ… samādahaṃ cittaṃ… vimocayaṃ cittaṃ … aniccānupassī… virāgānupassī… nirodhānupassī. Paṭinissaggānupassī assasissāmīti sikkhati. Paṭinissaggānupassī passasissāmīti sikkhatī’’ti –
Evaṃ soḷasavatthukaṃ ānāpānassatikammaṭṭhānaṃ niddiṭṭhaṃ. Tassa bhāvanānayo anuppatto. So pana yasmā pāḷivaṇṇanānusāreneva vuccamāno sabbākāraparipūro hoti. Tasmā ayamettha pāḷivaṇṇanāpubbaṅgamo niddeso.
216. Kathaṃ bhāvito ca, bhikkhave, ānāpānassati samādhīti ettha tāva kathanti ānāpānassatisamādhibhāvanaṃ nānappakārato vitthāretukamyatāpucchā. Bhāvito ca bhikkhave ānāpānassatisamādhīti nānappakārato vitthāretukamyatāya puṭṭhadhammanidassanaṃ. Kathaṃ bahulīkato…pe… vūpasametīti etthāpi eseva nayo. Tattha bhāvitoti uppādito vaḍḍhito vā. Ānāpānassatisamādhīti ānāpānapariggāhikāya satiyā saddhiṃ sampayutto samādhi. Ānāpānassatiyaṃ vā samādhi ānāpānassatisamādhi. Bahulīkatoti punappunaṃ kato. Santoceva paṇīto cāti santo ceva paṇīto ceva. Ubhayattha eva saddena niyamo veditabbo. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Ayañhi yathā asubhakammaṭṭhānaṃ kevalaṃ paṭivedhavasena santañca paṇītañca, oḷārikārammaṇattā pana paṭikkūlārammaṇattā ca ārammaṇavasena neva santaṃ na paṇītaṃ, na evaṃ kenaci pariyāyena asanto vā apaṇīto vā, atha kho ārammaṇasantatāyapi santo vūpasanto nibbuto, paṭivedhasaṅkhātaaṅgasantatāyapi. Ārammaṇapaṇītatāyapi paṇīto atittikaro, aṅgapaṇītatāyapīti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘santo ceva paṇīto cā’’ti.
Asecanako ca sukho ca vihāroti ettha pana nāssa secananti asecanako, anāsittako abbokiṇṇo pāṭiyekko āveṇiko. Natthi ettha parikammena vā upacārena vā santatā. Ādisamannāhārato pabhuti attano sabhāveneva santo ca paṇīto cāti attho. Keci pana asecanakoti anāsittako ojavanto sabhāveneva madhuroti vadanti. Evaṃ ayaṃ asecanako ca, appitappitakkhaṇe kāyikacetasikasukhapaṭilābhāya saṃvattanato sukho ca vihāroti veditabbo. Uppannuppanneti avikkhambhite avikkhambhite. Pāpaketi lāmake. Akusale dhammeti akosallasambhūte dhamme. Ṭhānaso antaradhāpetīti khaṇeneva antaradhāpeti vikkhambheti. Vūpasametīti suṭṭhu upasameti. Nibbedhabhāgiyattā vā anupubbena ariyamaggavuddhippatto samucchindati, paṭippassambhetīti vuttaṃ hoti.
Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepattho. Bhikkhave, kena pakārena kenākārena kena vidhinā bhāvito ānāpānassatisamādhi kena pakārena bahulīkato santo ceva…pe… vūpasametīti.
217已对照

二百一十七、现在,为详说那义,[世尊]说了「诸比丘,在此」等语。此中,「诸比丘,在此,比丘(idha bhikkhave bhikkhu)」者:诸比丘,在此教法中的比丘。此中这「在此(idha)」一词,显示能生起一切种类入出息念定之人所依止的教法,并否定其他教法有此性质。因为这已被说过:「诸比丘,唯在此[教法]中才有沙门……乃至……其他外道之说空无[真]沙门。」(《中部》1.139)因此说「在此教法中的比丘」。

217. Idāni tamatthaṃ vitthārento ‘‘idha, bhikkhave’’tiādimāha. Tattha idha bhikkhave bhikkhūti bhikkhave, imasmiṃ sāsane bhikkhu. Ayañhi ettha idhasaddo sabbappakāraānāpānassatisamādhinibbattakassa puggalassa sannissayabhūtasāsanaparidīpano aññasāsanassa tathābhāvapaṭisedhano ca. Vuttañhetaṃ – idheva, bhikkhave, samaṇo…pe… suññā parappavādā samaṇebhi aññehī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.139). Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘imasmiṃ sāsane bhikkhū’’ti.
缅 1.261已对照

「前往林野……乃至……或前往空闲处(araññagato vā…pe… suññāgāragato vā)」——这显示他摄取适合修习入出息念定的坐卧处。因为这位比丘长夜以来于色等所缘上散逸的心,不愿登上入出息念定的所缘,就像套了劣牛的车一样,只往歧路上跑。因此,就像牧牛人想要驯服那喝尽劣母牛全部乳汁而长大的劣牛犊,便把它从母牛处牵开,在一旁埋下一根大柱,用绳把它系在那里;于是那牛犊四处挣扎却无法逃脱,只好靠着那根柱子坐下或卧下——同样地,这位比丘想要驯服那长夜以来饮色等所缘之味而长成的恶心,也应把它从色等所缘处牵开,进入林野……乃至……或空闲处,在那里用念之绳把它系在入出息之柱上。这样,他的心即使四处挣扎,也得不到从前所惯习的所缘,无法挣断念绳而逃脱,便依近行与安止而靠着那同一所缘坐下、卧下。因此古师们说——

Araññagato vā…pe… suññāgāragato vāti idamassa ānāpānassatisamādhibhāvanānurūpasenāsanapariggahaparidīpanaṃ. Imassa hi bhikkhuno dīgharattaṃ rūpādīsu ārammaṇesu anuvisaṭaṃ cittaṃ ānāpānassatisamādhiārammaṇaṃ abhiruhituṃ na icchati, kūṭagoṇayuttaratho viya uppathameva dhāvati. Tasmā seyyathāpi nāma gopo kūṭadhenuyā sabbaṃ khīraṃ pivitvā vaḍḍhitaṃ kūṭavacchaṃ dametukāmo dhenuto apanetvā ekamante mahantaṃ thambhaṃ nikhaṇitvā tattha yottena bandheyya, athassa so vaccho ito cito ca vipphanditvā palāyituṃ asakkonto tameva thambhaṃ upanisīdeyya vā upanipajjeyya vā, evameva imināpi bhikkhunā dīgharattaṃ rūpārammaṇādirasapānavaḍḍhitaṃ duṭṭhacittaṃ dametukāmena rūpādiārammaṇato apanetvā araññaṃ vā…pe… suññāgāraṃ vā pavesetvā tattha assāsapassāsathambhe satiyottena bandhitabbaṃ. Evamassa taṃ cittaṃ ito cito ca vipphanditvāpi pubbe āciṇṇārammaṇaṃ alabhamānaṃ satiyottaṃ chinditvā palāyituṃ asakkontaṃ tamevārammaṇaṃ upacārappanāvasena upanisīdati ceva upanipajjati ca. Tenāhu porāṇā –
已对照

「犹如此世驯犊之人,把牛犊系在柱上;

‘‘Yathā thambhe nibandheyya, vacchaṃ damaṃ naro idha;
已对照

应当这样把自己的心,牢系于念的所缘。」(《波罗夷义注》2.165;《长部义注》3.374;《中部义注》1.107)

Bandheyyevaṃ sakaṃ cittaṃ, satiyārammaṇe daḷha’’nti. (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.165; dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.374; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.107);
已对照

这样,这坐卧处便适合于他的修习。因此说「这显示他摄取适合修习入出息念定的坐卧处」。

Evamassetaṃ senāsanaṃ bhāvanānurūpaṃ hoti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘idamassa ānāpānassatisamādhibhāvanānurūpasenāsanapariggahaparidīpana’’nti.
已对照

或者,由于这在业处的类别中作为顶的、是一切知佛、独觉佛、声闻弟子证得殊胜与现法乐住之近因的入出息念业处,若不舍离充满男女象马等声音的村落边,是不易修习的——因为声是禅那的荆棘;而在没有村落的林野中,瑜伽行者却容易摄取这个业处,生起入出息第四禅,以它为基础,思择诸行而证得最上果阿罗汉[果]。因此,世尊为显示适合他的坐卧处,才说了「前往林野」等语。

Atha vā yasmā idaṃ kammaṭṭhānappabhede muddhabhūtaṃ sabbaññubuddhapaccekabuddhabuddhasāvakānaṃ visesādhigamadiṭṭhadhammasukhavihārapadaṭṭhānaṃ ānāpānassatikammaṭṭhānaṃ itthipurisahatthiassādisaddasamākulaṃ gāmantaṃ apariccajitvā na sukaraṃ bhāvetuṃ, saddakaṇṭakattā jhānassa. Agāmake pana araññe sukaraṃ yogāvacarena idaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ pariggahetvā ānāpānacatutthajjhānaṃ nibbattetvā tadeva pādakaṃ katvā saṅkhāre sammasitvā aggaphalaṃ arahattaṃ sampāpuṇituṃ. Tasmāssa anurūpasenāsanaṃ dassento bhagavā ‘‘araññagato vā’’tiādimāha.
已对照

因为世尊犹如相地术的老师。就像相地术的老师看了城的地形、仔细详察之后指示说「在这里造城吧」,城平安建成之后,他便从王族获得大礼遇;同样地,[世尊]详察了适合瑜伽行者的坐卧处之后指示说「应当在这里勤修业处」,此后在那里勤修业处的瑜伽者次第证得阿罗汉[果]时,[世尊]便因「那位世尊真是正等正觉者啊」而获得大礼遇。

Vatthuvijjācariyo viya hi bhagavā, so yathā vatthuvijjācariyo nagarabhūmiṃ passitvā suṭṭhu upaparikkhitvā ‘‘ettha nagaraṃ māpethā’’ti upadisati, sotthinā ca nagare niṭṭhite rājakulato mahāsakkāraṃ labhati, evameva yogāvacarassa anurūpasenāsanaṃ upaparikkhitvā ‘‘ettha kammaṭṭhānaṃ anuyuñjitabba’’nti upadisati, tato tattha kammaṭṭhānaṃ anuyuttena yoginā kamena arahatte patte ‘‘sammāsambuddho vata so bhagavā’’ti mahantaṃ sakkāraṃ labhati.
已对照

而这位比丘被说为像豹一样。就像大豹王在林野中依止草丛、密林或山丛而潜伏,捕取森林水牛、牛耳鹿、野猪等诸兽;同样地,应知这位在林野等处勤修业处的比丘,也依次第取得须陀洹道、斯陀含道、阿那含道、阿罗汉道以及圣果。因此古师们说——

Ayaṃ pana bhikkhu dīpisadisoti vuccati. Yathā hi mahādīpirājā araññe tiṇagahanaṃ vā vanagahanaṃ vā pabbatagahanaṃ vā nissāya nilīyitvā vanamahiṃsagokaṇṇasūkarādayo mige gaṇhāti, evameva ayaṃ araññādīsu kammaṭṭhānaṃ anuyuñjanto bhikkhu yathākkamena sotāpattisakadāgāmianāgāmiarahattamagge ceva ariyaphalañca gaṇhatīti veditabbo. Tenāhu porāṇā –
缅 1.262已对照

「犹如名为豹者,潜伏而捕诸兽;

‘‘Yathāpi dīpiko nāma, nilīyitvā gaṇhatī mige;
已对照

这佛子亦如是,勤修瑜伽的观者;

Tathevāyaṃ buddhaputto, yuttayogo vipassako;
已对照

进入林野之后,取得最上之果。」(《波罗夷义注》2.165;《长部义注》2.374;《中部义注》1.107)

Araññaṃ pavisitvāna, gaṇhāti phalamuttama’’nti. (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.165; dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.374; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.107);
已对照

因此,世尊为显示他勤勇奋进所宜之地——林野坐卧处,才说了「前往林野」等语。

Tenassa parakkamajavayoggabhūmiṃ araññasenāsanaṃ dassento bhagavā ‘‘araññagato vā’’tiādimāha.
218已对照

二百一十八、此中,「前往林野(araññagato)」者:即在如是所说之相的诸林野——「出了因陀罗柱之外,这一切都是林野」(《分别论》529),以及「所谓林野的坐卧处,至少[相距]五百弓」(《波罗夷》654)——中,前往任何一处有远离之乐的林野。「前往树下(rukkhamūlagato)」者:即前往树的近旁。「前往空闲处(suññāgāragato)」者:即前往空的、僻静的处所。而此中,除了林野与树下之外,前往其余七种坐卧处者,也可以说是「前往空闲处」。

218. Tattha araññagatoti ‘‘araññanti nikkhamitvā bahi indakhīlā sabbametaṃ arañña’’nti (vibha. 529) ca, ‘‘āraññakaṃ nāma senāsanaṃ pañcadhanusatikaṃ pacchima’’nti (pārā. 654) ca evaṃ vuttalakkhaṇesu araññesu yaṃkiñci pavivekasukhaṃ araññaṃ gato. Rukkhamūlagatoti rukkhasamīpaṃ gato. Suññāgāragatoti suññaṃ vivittokāsaṃ gato. Ettha ca ṭhapetvā araññañca rukkhamūlañca avasesasattavidhasenāsanagatopi suññāgāragatoti vattuṃ vaṭṭati.
已对照

如是为他指示了随顺三季、随顺界与性行、适合入出息念之修习的坐卧处之后,[世尊]为指示不属退缩、不属掉举一边的寂静威仪,而说「坐下(nisīdati)」。然后,为显示他坐姿的稳固、入出息转起的舒适,以及摄取所缘的方便,说了「结跏趺」等语。此中,「跏趺(pallaṅkaṃ)」者:即周匝以大腿相缚之坐。「结(ābhujitvā)」者:即缚。「保持其身正直(ujuṃ kāyaṃ paṇidhāya)」者:即把上半身端正安置,使十八节脊椎骨端端相接。因为这样坐着,皮、肉、筋腱便不弯曲下垂。于是,那些因它们弯曲下垂为缘而每一刹那会生起的诸受,便不生起。那些[受]不生起时,心便得专一,业处不致散失,得以增长、进展。「使念现起于面前(parimukhaṃ satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvā)」者:即把念安置为朝向业处。或者,「围(pari)」是摄取之义,「面(mukha)」是出离之义,「念(sati)」是现起之义,因此说「使念现起于面前」——此处之义也应依《无碍解道》(《无碍解道》1.164)中如是所说的方法而见。此中简要[之义]是:「作成已摄取、已出离之念」。

Evamassa ututtayānukūlaṃ dhātucariyānukūlañca ānāpānassatibhāvanānurūpaṃ senāsanaṃ upadisitvā alīnānuddhaccapakkhikaṃ santaṃ iriyāpathaṃ upadisanto nisīdatīti āha. Athassa nisajjāya daḷhabhāvaṃ assāsapassāsānaṃ pavattanasukhataṃ ārammaṇapariggahūpāyañca dassento pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvātiādimāha. Tattha pallaṅkanti samantato ūrubaddhāsanaṃ. Ābhujitvāti bandhitvā. Ujuṃ kāyaṃ paṇidhāyāti uparimasarīraṃ ujukaṃ ṭhapetvā. Aṭṭhārasapiṭṭhikaṇṭake koṭiyā koṭiṃ paṭipādetvā. Evañhi nisīdantassa cammamaṃsanhārūni na paṇamanti. Athassa yā tesaṃ paṇamanappaccayā khaṇe khaṇe vedanā uppajjeyyuṃ, tā na uppajjanti. Tāsu anuppajjamānāsu cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hoti, kammaṭṭhānaṃ na paripatati, vuddhiṃ phātiṃ upagacchati. Parimukhaṃ satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvāti kammaṭṭhānābhimukhaṃ satiṃ ṭhapayitvā. Atha vā parīti pariggahaṭṭho. Mukhanti niyyānaṭṭho. Satīti upaṭṭhānaṭṭho. Tena vuccati ‘‘parimukhaṃ sati’’nti evaṃ paṭisambhidāyaṃ (paṭi. ma. 1.164) vuttanayenapettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Tatrāyaṃ saṅkhepo, pariggahitaniyyānaṃ satiṃ katvāti.
219缅 1.263已对照

二百一十九、「他只是具念地入息,具念地出息(so satova assasati sato passasati)」者:即那位比丘如是坐下、如是使念现起之后,不舍弃那念,正是具念地入息、具念地出息——是说他成为具念而行者(satokārī)。现在,为显示他以哪些行相成为具念而行者,[世尊]说了「入息长时」等语。因为这已在《无碍解道》中,于「他只是具念地入息,具念地出息」这一[句]本身的分别里说过——

「以三十二种行相成为具念而行者。依长入息而了知心一境性、不散乱者,念便现起;以那念、以那智,他成为具念而行者。依长出息……乃至……依随观舍离的入息。依随观舍离的出息而了知心一境性、不散乱者,念便现起;以那念、以那智,他成为具念而行者。」(《无碍解道》1.165)

此中,「入息长时(dīghaṃ vā assasanto)」者:即令长的入息转起。「入息(assāso)」者:即向外出去的风;「出息(passāso)」者:即向内进入的风——这是在律义注中所说的。而在诸经义注中,则以相反的次序而出。此中,一切胎卧者从母胎出来时,首先是内里的风向外出去;然后外面的风带着微细的尘进入内里,触到上腭而熄灭。入出息首先应如是了知。

而它们的长与短,应依距离而知。犹如遍布于空间之距离而住立的水或沙,被说为「长的水、长的沙」「短的水、短的沙」;同样,即使是细碎分散的入出息,在象的身体与蛇的身体中,也是缓慢地充满它们称为自体的长距离,又缓慢地出去,所以被称为「长」。它们迅速地充满狗、兔等称为自体的短距离,又迅速地出去,所以被称为「短」。而在人当中,有些人如象、蛇等那样,依时间的距离而长长地入息、出息;有些人如狗、兔等那样短短地[入息、出息]。所以应知,对他们而言,依时间而在长距离中出去与进入的那些[入出息]是「长」,在短暂距离中出去与进入的是「短」。

此中,这位比丘以九种行相入息长、出息长时,了知「我入息长、出息长」;而应知,他如是了知时,以一种行相,身随观念处的修习便得成就。即如《无碍解道》(《无碍解道》1.166)中所说——

「如何入息长时了知『我入息长』,出息长时了知『我出息长』?他于称为距离者中入长的入息;他于称为距离者中出长的出息;他于称为距离者中入、出长的入出息。于称为距离者中入、出长的入出息时,欲便生起。由于欲,他于称为距离者中入比那更微细的长的入息;由于欲,比那更微细的长的出息……乃至……于称为距离者中入、出长的入出息。由于欲,于称为距离者中入、出比那更微细的长的入出息时,愉悦便生起。由于愉悦,他于称为距离者中入比那更微细的长的入息;由于愉悦,比那更微细的长的出息……乃至……于称为距离者中入、出长的入出息。由于愉悦,于称为距离者中入、出比那更微细的长的入出息时,心便从长的入出息转离,舍便安住。以这九种行相,长的入出息是身;现起是念;随观是智。身是现起[处],不是念;念既是现起[处],也是念。以那念、以那智,他随观那身。因此称为于身随观身的念处修习。」

于「短」一句也是这个方法。而这是差别:正如此处说「于称为距离者中[入]长的入息」,在那[短句]里出现的则是「于称为短暂者中入短的入息」。所以应依「短」而配合,直到「因此称为于身随观身的念处修习」为止。

如是,应知这[比丘]依距离与依短暂,以这些行相了知入出息,[便是]「入息长时,了知『我入息长』……乃至……出息短时,了知『我出息短』」。而他如是了知时——

入息有长短,

出息亦如是;

四种[行相]转起,

或在比丘的鼻端。(《波罗夷义注》2.165)

219. So satova assasati sato passasatīti so bhikkhu evaṃ nisīditvā evañca satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvā taṃ satiṃ avijahanto sato eva assasati sato passasati, satokārī hotīti vuttaṃ hoti. Idāni yehākārehi satokārī hoti, te dassetuṃ dīghaṃ vā assasantotiādimāha. Vuttañhetaṃ paṭisambhidāyaṃ ‘‘so satova assasati sato passasatī’’ti etasseva vibhaṅge –
‘‘Bāttiṃsāya ākārehi sato kārī hoti. Dīghaṃ assāsavasena cittassa ekaggataṃ avikkhepaṃ pajānato sati upaṭṭhitā hoti. Tāya satiyā tena ñāṇena sato kārī hoti. Dīghaṃ passāsavasena…pe… paṭinissaggānupassī assāsavasena. Paṭinissaggānupassī passāsavasena cittassa ekaggataṃ avikkhepaṃ pajānato sati upaṭṭhitā hoti. Tāya satiyā tena ñāṇena sato kārī hotī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.165).
Tattha dīghaṃ vā assasantoti dīghaṃ vā assāsaṃ pavattayanto. Assāsoti bahi nikkhamanavāto. Passāsoti anto pavisanavātoti vinayaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ. Suttantaṭṭhakathāsu pana uppaṭipāṭiyā āgataṃ. Tattha sabbesampi gabbhaseyyakānaṃ mātukucchito nikkhamanakāle paṭhamaṃ abbhantaravāto bahi nikkhamati. Pacchā bāhiravāto sukhumarajaṃ gahetvā abbhantaraṃ pavisanto tāluṃ āhacca nibbāyati. Evaṃ tāva assāsapassāsā veditabbā.
Yā pana tesaṃ dīgharassatā, sā addhānavasena veditabbā. Yathā hi okāsaddhānaṃ pharitvā ṭhitaṃ udakaṃ vā vālikā vā ‘‘dīghamudakaṃ dīghā vālikā, rassamudakaṃ rassā vālikā’’ti vuccati, evaṃ cuṇṇavicuṇṇāpi assāsapassāsā hatthisarīre ca ahisarīre ca tesaṃ attabhāvasaṅkhātaṃ dīghaṃ addhānaṃ saṇikaṃ pūretvā saṇikameva nikkhamanti. Tasmā dīghāti vuccanti. Sunakhasasādīnaṃ attabhāvasaṅkhātaṃ rassaṃ addhānaṃ sīghaṃ pūretvā sīghameva nikkhamanti, tasmā rassāti vuccanti. Manussesu pana keci hatthiahiādayo viya kāladdhānavasena dīghaṃ assasanti ca passasanti ca. Keci sunakhasasādayo viya rassaṃ, tasmā tesaṃ kālavasena dīghamaddhānaṃ nikkhamantā ca pavisantā ca te ‘‘dīghā’’ ittaramaddhānaṃ nikkhamantā ca pavisantā ca ‘‘rassā’’ti veditabbā.
Tatrāyaṃ bhikkhu navahākārehi dīghaṃ assasanto passasanto ca ‘‘dīghaṃ assasāmi, passasāmī’’ti pajānāti. Evaṃ pajānato cassa ekenākārena kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānabhāvanā sampajjatīti veditabbā. Yathāha paṭisambhidāyaṃ (paṭi. ma. 1.166) –
‘‘Kathaṃ dīghaṃ assasanto dīghaṃ assasāmīti pajānāti. Dīghaṃ passasanto dīghaṃ passasāmīti pajānāti. Dīghaṃ assāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte assasati. Dīghaṃ passāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte passasati. Dīghaṃ assāsapassāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte assasatipi passasatipi. Dīghaṃ assāsapassāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte assasatopi passasatopi chando uppajjati. Chandavasena tato sukhumataraṃ dīghaṃ assāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte assasati. Chandavasena tato sukhumataraṃ dīghaṃ passāsaṃ…pe… dīghaṃ assāsapassāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte assasatipi passasatipi. Chandavasena tato sukhumataraṃ dīghaṃ assāsapassāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte assasatopi passasatopi pāmojjaṃ uppajjati. Pāmojjavasena tato sukhumataraṃ dīghaṃ assāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte assasati. Pāmojjavasena tato sukhumataraṃ dīghaṃ passāsaṃ…pe… dīghaṃ assāsapassāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte assasatipi passasatipi. Pāmojjavasena tato sukhumataraṃ dīghaṃ assāsapassāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte assasatopi passasatopi dīghaṃ assāsapassāsā cittaṃ vivattati, upekkhā saṇṭhāti. Imehi navahi ākārehi dīghaṃ assāsapassāsā kāyo. Upaṭṭhānaṃ sati. Anupassanā ñāṇaṃ. Kāyo upaṭṭhānaṃ, no sati. Sati upaṭṭhānañceva sati ca. Tāya satiyā tena ñāṇena taṃ kāyaṃ anupassati. Tena vuccati kāye kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānabhāvanā’’ti.
Esa nayo rassapadepi. Ayaṃ pana viseso, yathā ettha ‘‘dīghaṃ assāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte’’ti vuttaṃ, evamidha ‘‘rassaṃ assāsaṃ ittarasaṅkhāte assasatī’’ti āgataṃ. Tasmā rassavasena yāva ‘‘tena vuccati kāye kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānabhāvanā’’ti, tāva yojetabbaṃ.
Evaṃ ayaṃ addhānavasena ittaravasena ca imehākārehi assāsapassāse pajānanto dīghaṃ vā assasanto dīghaṃ assasāmīti pajānāti…pe… rassaṃ vā passasanto rassaṃ passasāmīti pajānātīti veditabbo. Evaṃ pajānato cassa –
Dīgho rasso ca assāso,
Passāsopi ca tādiso;
Cattāro vaṇṇā vattanti,
Nāsikaggeva bhikkhunoti. (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.165);
220已对照

二百二十、「他学『我将觉知全身而入息……乃至……出息』(sabbakāyapaṭisaṃvedī assasissāmi…pe… passasissāmīti sikkhati)」者:即「我将使整个入息身的初、中、后都被知晓、使之明显而入息」,他这样学;「我将使整个出息身的初、中、后都被知晓、使之明显而出息」,他这样学。如是使之被知晓、使之明显,以与智相应的心入息、出息;所以说「他学『我将入息、出息』」。因为对某一比丘而言,在细碎分散而散布的入息身或出息身中,开头是明显的,中间与末后则不[明显];他只能摄取开头,在中间与末后便疲倦。对某一[比丘]而言,中间是明显的,开头与末后则不[明显]。对某一[比丘]而言,末后是明显的,开头与中间则不[明显];他只能摄取末后,在开头与中间便疲倦。对某一[比丘]而言,一切都是明显的;他能摄取一切,在任何地方都不疲倦。[世尊]为显示「应当成为这样的人」,而说:「他学『我将觉知全身而入息……乃至……出息』。」

220. Sabbakāyapaṭisaṃvedī assasissāmi…pe… passasissāmīti sikkhatīti sakalassa assāsakāyassa ādimajjhapariyosānaṃ viditaṃ karonto pākaṭaṃ karonto assasissāmīti sikkhati. Sakalassa passāsakāyassa ādimajjhapariyosānaṃ viditaṃ karonto pākaṭaṃ karonto passasissāmīti sikkhati. Evaṃ viditaṃ karonto pākaṭaṃ karonto ñāṇasampayuttacittena assasati ceva passasati ca. Tasmā ‘‘assasissāmi passasissāmī’’ti sikkhatīti vuccati. Ekassa hi bhikkhuno cuṇṇavicuṇṇavisaṭe assāsakāye passāsakāye vā ādi pākaṭo hoti, na majjhapariyosānaṃ. So ādimeva pariggahetuṃ sakkoti, majjhapariyosāne kilamati. Ekassa majjhaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti, na ādipariyosānaṃ. Ekassa pariyosānaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti, na ādimajjhaṃ. So pariyosānaṃyeva pariggahetuṃ sakkoti, ādimajjhe kilamati. Ekassa sabbampi pākaṭaṃ hoti, so sabbampi pariggahetuṃ sakkoti, na katthaci kilamati, tādisena bhavitabbanti dassento āha – ‘‘sabbakāyapaṭisaṃvedī assasissāmīti…pe… passasissāmīti sikkhatī’’ti.
缅 1.266已对照

此中,「他学(sikkhati)」者:即他如是努力、精勤。或者,这样的人的律仪,这是此中的增上戒学;这样的人的定,这是增上心学;这样的人的慧,这是增上慧学——他于那所缘上,以那念、以那作意,学、习行、修习、多作这三学,此中之义应如是见。

Tattha sikkhatīti evaṃ ghaṭati vāyamati. Yo vā tathābhūtassa saṃvaro, ayamettha adhisīlasikkhā. Yo tathābhūtassa samādhi, ayaṃ adhicittasikkhā. Yā tathābhūtassa paññā, ayaṃ adhipaññāsikkhāti imā tisso sikkhāyo tasmiṃ ārammaṇe tāya satiyā tena manasikārena sikkhati āsevati bhāveti bahulīkarotīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
已对照

此中,由于在前一种方式中,只应入息、出息,不应作其他任何事;而从此以后,则应当致力于令智生起等。所以,在那里以现在时说圣典「了知『我入息』,了知『我出息』」;而为显示从此以后所应作的令智生起等行相,以「他学『我将觉知全身而入息』」等方式,以未来时的言词安立圣典——应如是知。

Tattha yasmā purimanaye kevalaṃ assasitabbaṃ passasitabbameva, na ca aññaṃ kiñci kātabbaṃ. Ito paṭṭhāya pana ñāṇuppādanādīsu yogo karaṇīyo. Tasmā tattha assasāmīti pajānāti passasāmīti pajānāticceva vattamānakālavasena pāḷiṃ vatvā ito paṭṭhāya kattabbassa ñāṇuppādanādino ākārassa dassanatthaṃ sabbakāyapaṭisaṃvedī assasissāmītiādinā nayena anāgatavacanavasena pāḷi āropitāti veditabbā.
已对照

「他学『我将令身行止息而入息……乃至……出息』(passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ assasissāmīti…pe… passasissāmīti sikkhati)」者:即「我将一边令粗的身行止息、安息、灭、平息,一边入息、出息」,他这样学。此中,粗、微细与止息(passaddhi)应如是知。因为这位比丘在先前未摄取的时候,身与心都有焦虑、是粗的。身心的粗性未平息时,入出息也是粗的,更强地转起,鼻子不够用,他也以口入息、出息而住。而当他的身与心都被摄取时,那时它们便寂静、平息;它们平息时,入出息便微细地转起,达到须要探察「到底有还是没有」的行相。

Passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ assasissāmīti…pe… passasissāmīti sikkhatīti oḷārikaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ passambhento paṭippassambhento nirodhento vūpasamento assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhati. Tatra evaṃ oḷārikasukhumatā ca passaddhi ca veditabbā. Imassa hi bhikkhuno pubbe apariggahitakāle kāyo ca cittañca sadarathā honti oḷārikā. Kāyacittānaṃ oḷārikatte avūpasante assāsapassāsāpi oḷārikā honti, balavatarā hutvā pavattanti, nāsikā nappahoti, mukhena assasantopi passasantopi tiṭṭhati. Yadā panassa kāyopi cittampi pariggahitā honti, tadā te santā honti vūpasantā. Tesu vūpasantesu assāsapassāsā sukhumā hutvā pavattanti, ‘‘atthi nu kho natthī’’ti vicetabbatākārappattā honti.
缅 1.267已对照

譬如一个人奔跑之后,或从山上下来之后,或从头上放下重担之后站着时,入出息是粗的,鼻子不够用,他也以口入息、出息而住;而当他消除了那疲劳,沐浴、饮水,把湿布放在胸口,躺在清凉的树荫下时,他的那些入出息便变得微细,达到须要探察「到底有还是没有」的行相;同样,这位比丘在先前未摄取的时候,身与……乃至……达到须要探察的行相。这是什么缘故呢?因为他在先前未摄取的时候,没有「我令一个个粗的身行止息」这样的关注、注意、作意、省察,而在摄取的时候则有。所以,他的身行在摄取之时比未摄取之时微细。因此古师们说——

Seyyathāpi purisassa dhāvitvā, pabbatā vā orohitvā, mahābhāraṃ vā sīsato oropetvā ṭhitassa oḷārikā assāsapassāsā honti, nāsikā nappahoti, mukhena assasantopi passasantopi tiṭṭhati. Yadā panesa taṃ parissamaṃ vinodetvā nhatvā ca pivitvā ca allasāṭakaṃ hadaye katvā sītāya chāyāya nipanno hoti, athassa te assāsapassāsā sukhumā honti ‘‘atthi nu kho natthī’’ti vicetabbatākārappattā, evameva imassa bhikkhuno pubbe apariggahitakāle kāyo ca…pe… vicetabbatākārappattā honti. Taṃ kissa hetu? Tathā hissa pubbe apariggahitakāle ‘‘oḷārikoḷārike kāyasaṅkhāre passambhemī’’ti ābhogasamannāhāramanasikārapaccavekkhaṇā natthi, pariggahitakāle pana atthi. Tenassa apariggahitakālato pariggahitakāle kāyasaṅkhāro sukhumo hoti. Tenāhu porāṇā –
已对照

「身与心躁动时,[身行]便过强地转起;

‘‘Sāraddhe kāye citte ca, adhimattaṃ pavattati;
已对照

身不躁动之时,便微细地转起。」(《波罗夷义注》2.165)

Asāraddhamhi kāyamhi, sukhumaṃ sampavattatī’’ti. (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.165);
221缅 1.268已对照

二百二十一、[身行]于摄取时也是粗的,于初禅近行时是微细的;于那[初禅近行]时也是粗的,于初禅时是微细的;于初禅与第二禅近行时是粗的,于第二禅时是微细的;于第二禅与第三禅近行时是粗的,于第三禅时是微细的;于第三禅与第四禅近行时是粗的,于第四禅时极微细,甚至达到不转起。这暂且是长部诵者与相应部诵者的见解。

而中部诵者们则主张:[身行]于初禅时是粗的,于第二禅近行时是微细的——如是,比起一一较下的禅,于一一较上的禅的近行时也更微细。然而依一切[诸师]的见解,在未摄取时转起的身行,于摄取时安息;在摄取时转起的身行,于初禅近行时……乃至……在第四禅近行时转起的身行,于第四禅时安息。这暂且是止中的方法。

而在观中,未摄取时转起的身行是粗的,于摄取大种时是微细的;那也是粗的,于摄取所造色时是微细的;那也是粗的,于摄取一切色时是微细的;那也是粗的,于摄取非色时是微细的;那也是粗的,于摄取色与非色时是微细的;那也是粗的,于摄取缘时是微细的;那也是粗的,于摄取有缘的名色时是微细的;那也是粗的,于以相为所缘的观时是微细的;那于弱观时是粗的,于强观时是微细的。此中,应依前面所说的方法,知前前[身行]由后后[身行]而安息。如是,此中应知粗、微细与止息。

而在《无碍解道》(《无碍解道》1.171)中,连同诘责与澄清,它的义是这样说的——

「如何『我将令身行止息而入息……乃至……出息』,他这样学?什么是身行?长的入出息是身的,这些法系属于身,是身行。他一边令那些身行止息、灭、平息,一边学……乃至……凡由于那样的身行而有身的前屈、侧屈、遍屈、后屈、动摇、颤动、晃动、震动,[对此]他学『我将令身行止息而入息』,他学『我将令身行止息而出息』。凡由于那样的身行而身无前屈、无侧屈、无遍屈、无后屈,不动摇、不颤动、不晃动、不震动,[对此]他学『我将令身行止息为寂静、微细的而入息、出息』。

「若是这样:他学『我将令身行止息而入息』,他学『我将令身行止息而出息』——既然如此,便没有风之觉知的产生,也没有入出息的产生,也没有入出息念的产生,也没有入出息念定的产生,智者们也不入那等至,也不从[它]出起。

「若是这样:他学『我将令身行止息而入息、出息』——既然如此,便有风之觉知的产生,有入出息的产生,有入出息念的产生,有入出息念定的产生,智者们也入那等至,也从[它]出起。犹如什么呢?

「犹如敲击铜器时,起先粗的声音转起;由于粗的声音之相已善取、已善作意、已善确知,即使粗的声音已灭,其后微细的声音转起;由于微细的声音之相已善取、已善作意、已善确知,即使微细的声音已灭,其后心也以微细的声音之相为所缘而转起。同样,起先粗的入出息转起;由于粗的入出息之相已善取、已善作意、已善确知,即使粗的入出息已灭,其后微细的入出息转起;由于微细的入出息之相已善取、已善作意、已善确知,即使微细的入出息已灭,其后心也以微细的入出息之相为所缘,不趋于散乱。

「既然如此,便有风之觉知的产生,有入出息的产生,有入出息念的产生,有入出息念定的产生,智者们也入那等至,也从[它]出起。『令身行止息』的入出息是身;现起是念;随观是智。身是现起[处],不是念;念既是现起[处],也是念。以那念、以那智,他随观那身。因此称为于身随观身的念处修习。」

这暂且是此中依身随观而说的第一四法组的逐句释义。

221. Pariggahepi oḷāriko, paṭhamajjhānupacāre sukhumo. Tasmimpi oḷāriko, paṭhamajjhāne sukhumo. Paṭhamajjhāne ca dutiyajjhānupacāre ca oḷāriko, dutiyajjhāne sukhumo. Dutiyajjhāne ca tatiyajjhānupacāre ca oḷāriko, tatiyajjhāne sukhumo. Tatiyajjhāne ca catutthajjhānupacāre ca oḷāriko, catutthajjhāne atisukhumo appavattimeva pāpuṇātīti. Idaṃ tāva dīghabhāṇakasaṃyuttabhāṇakānaṃ mataṃ.
Majjhimabhāṇakā pana paṭhamajjhāne oḷāriko, dutiyajjhānupacāre sukhumoti evaṃ heṭṭhimaheṭṭhimajjhānato uparūparijjhānupacārepi sukhumataramicchanti. Sabbesaññeva pana matena apariggahitakāle pavattakāyasaṅkhāro pariggahitakāle paṭippassambhati. Pariggahitakāle pavattakāyasaṅkhāro paṭhamajjhānupacāre…pe… catutthajjhānupacāre pavattakāyasaṅkhāro catutthajjhāne paṭippassambhati. Ayaṃ tāva samathe nayo.
Vipassanāyaṃ pana apariggahe pavatto kāyasaṅkhāro oḷāriko, mahābhūtapariggahe sukhumo. Sopi oḷāriko, upādārūpapariggahe sukhumo. Sopi oḷāriko, sakalarūpapariggahe sukhumo. Sopi oḷāriko, arūpapariggahe sukhumo. Sopi oḷāriko, rūpārūpapariggahe sukhumo. Sopi oḷāriko, paccayapariggahe sukhumo. Sopi oḷāriko, sappaccayanāmarūpapariggahe sukhumo. Sopi oḷāriko, lakkhaṇārammaṇikavipassanāya sukhumo. Sopi dubbalavipassanāya oḷāriko, balavavipassanāya sukhumo. Tattha pubbe vuttanayeneva purimassa purimassa pacchimena pacchimena paṭippassaddhi veditabbā. Evamettha oḷārikasukhumatā ca passaddhi ca veditabbā.
Paṭisambhidāyaṃ (paṭi. ma. 1.171) panassa saddhiṃ codanāsodhanāhi evamattho vutto –
‘‘Kathaṃ passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ assasissāmi…pe… passasissāmīti sikkhati? Katame kāyasaṅkhārā? Dīghaṃ assāsapassāsā kāyikā ete dhammā kāyapaṭibaddhā kāyasaṅkhārā. Te kāyasaṅkhāre passambhento nirodhento vūpasamento sikkhati…pe… yathārūpehi kāyasaṅkhārehi kāyassa ānamanā, vinamanā, sannamanā, paṇamanā, iñjanā, phandanā, calanā, kampanā passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ assasissāmīti sikkhati, passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ passasissāmīti sikkhati. Yathārūpehi kāyasaṅkhārehi kāyassa na ānamanā, na vinamanā, na sannamanā, na paṇamanā, aniñjanā, aphandanā, acalanā, akampanā santaṃ sukhumaṃ passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhati.
‘‘Iti kira passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ assasissāmīti sikkhati. Passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ passasissāmīti sikkhati. Evaṃ sante vātūpaladdhiyā ca pabhāvanā na hoti. Assāsapassāsānañca pabhāvanā na hoti. Ānāpānassatiyā ca pabhāvanā na hoti, ānāpānassatisamādhissa ca pabhāvanā na hoti, na ca naṃ taṃ samāpattiṃ paṇḍitā samāpajjantipi vuṭṭhahantipi.
‘‘Iti kira passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhati. Evaṃ sante vātūpaladdhiyā ca pabhāvanā hoti, assāsapassāsānañca pabhāvanā hoti, ānāpānassatiyā ca pabhāvanā hoti, ānāpānassatisamādhissa ca pabhāvanā hoti, tañca naṃ samāpattiṃ paṇḍitā samāpajjantipi vuṭṭhahantipi. Yathā kathaṃ viya?
‘‘Seyyathāpi kaṃse ākoṭite paṭhamaṃ oḷārikā saddā pavattanti. Oḷārikānaṃ saddānaṃ nimittaṃ sugahitattā sumanasikatattā sūpadhāritattā niruddhepi oḷārike sadde atha pacchā sukhumakā saddā pavattanti. Sukhumakānaṃ saddānaṃ nimittaṃ suggahitattā sumanasikatattā sūpadhāritattā niruddhepi sukhumake sadde atha pacchā sukhumasaddanimittārammaṇatāpi cittaṃ pavattati, evameva paṭhamaṃ oḷārikā assāsapassāsā pavattanti. Oḷārikānaṃ assāsapassāsānaṃ nimittaṃ suggahitattā sumanasikatattā sūpadhāritattā niruddhepi oḷārike assāsapassāse atha pacchā sukhumakā assāsapassāsā pavattanti. Sukhumakānaṃ assāsapassāsānaṃ nimittaṃ suggahitattā sumanasikatattā sūpadhāritattā niruddhepi sukhumake assāsapassāse atha pacchā sukhumaassāsapassāsanimittārammaṇatāpi cittaṃ na vikkhepaṃ gacchati.
‘‘Evaṃ sante vātūpaladdhiyā ca pabhāvanā hoti, assāsapassāsānañca pabhāvanā hoti, ānāpānassatiyā ca pabhāvanā hoti, ānāpānassatisamādhissa ca pabhāvanā hoti, tañca naṃ samāpattiṃ paṇḍitā samāpajjantipi vuṭṭhahantipi. Passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ assāsapassāsā kāyo, upaṭṭhānaṃ sati, anupassanā ñāṇaṃ, kāyo upaṭṭhānaṃ, no sati, sati upaṭṭhānañceva sati ca, tāya satiyā tena ñāṇena taṃ kāyaṃ anupassati. Tena vuccati kāye kāyānupassanā satipaṭṭhānabhāvanā’’ti.
Ayaṃ tāvettha kāyānupassanāvasena vuttassa paṭhamacatukkassa anupubbapadavaṇṇanā.
222–223缅 1.270已对照

二百二十二、而由于此中唯这一个四法组是就初学者的业处而说的,其余三个四法组则是就此中已得禅者依受随观、心随观、法随观而说的;所以,想要修习这业处,以入出息第四禅为近因的观,连同诸无碍解证得阿罗汉[果]的初学的良家子,应依前面所说的方法作完净化戒等一切应作之事,然后在前面所说那样的阿阇梨跟前学取具五节的业处。

此中,这五节是:学取、遍问、现起、安止、相。此中,名为学取,即对业处的学取;名为遍问,即对业处的遍问;名为现起,即业处的现起;名为安止,即业处的安止;名为相,即业处的相——是说对业处之自性的确知:「这业处有如此之相」。

如是学取具五节的业处的人,自己不疲倦,也不烦扰阿阇梨。所以,应令[阿阇梨]少少地讲授,长时诵习,如是学取具五节的业处之后,住在阿阇梨跟前或别处前面所说那样的坐卧处中,断除小障碍,作完饭食之事,除去食后困顿,安适地坐下,以忆念三宝的功德而令心喜,对从阿阇梨处所学取的连一句也不迷乱,[如是]作意这入出息念业处。此中,这是作意的方法——

222. Yasmā panettha idameva catukkaṃ ādikammikassa kammaṭṭhānavasena vuttaṃ. Itarāni pana tīṇi catukkāni ettha pattajjhānassa vedanācittadhammānupassanāvasena vuttāni. Tasmā idaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ bhāvetvā ānāpānacatutthajjhānapadaṭṭhānāya vipassanāya saha paṭisambhidāhi arahattaṃ pāpuṇitukāmena ādikammikena kulaputtena pubbe vuttanayeneva sīlaparisodhanādīni sabbakiccāni katvā vuttappakārassa ācariyassa santike pañcasandhikaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ uggahetabbaṃ.
Tatrime pañca sandhayo uggaho, paripucchā, upaṭṭhānaṃ, appanā, lakkhaṇanti. Tattha uggaho nāma kammaṭṭhānassa uggaṇhanaṃ. Paripucchā nāma kammaṭṭhānassa paripucchanā. Upaṭṭhānaṃ nāma kammaṭṭhānassa upaṭṭhānaṃ. Appanā nāma kammaṭṭhānassa appanā. Lakkhaṇaṃ nāma kammaṭṭhānassa lakkhaṇaṃ. ‘‘Evaṃlakkhaṇamidaṃ kammaṭṭhāna’’nti kammaṭṭhānasabhāvūpadhāraṇanti vuttaṃ hoti.
Evaṃ pañcasandhikaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ uggaṇhanto attanāpi na kilamati, ācariyampi na viheseti. Tasmā thokaṃ uddisāpetvā bahukālaṃ sajjhāyitvā evaṃ pañcasandhikaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ uggahetvā ācariyassa santike vā aññatra vā pubbe vuttappakāre senāsane vasantena upacchinnakhuddakapalibodhena katabhattakiccena bhattasammadaṃ paṭivinodetvā sukhanisinnena ratanattayaguṇānussaraṇena cittaṃ sampahaṃsetvā ācariyuggahato ekapadampi asammuyhantena idaṃ ānāpānassatikammaṭṭhānaṃ manasi kātabbaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ manasikāravidhi –
223.
已对照

二百二十三、

「计数、随逐、触、安置、观察,

Gaṇanā anubandhanā, phusanā ṭhapanā sallakkhaṇā;
已对照

还转、遍净,以及它们的回观。」

Vivaṭṭanā pārisuddhi, tesañca paṭipassanāti.
已对照

此中,「计数(gaṇanā)」者:即唯是计数。「随逐(anubandhanā)」者:即随运。「触(phusanā)」者:即所触之处。「安置(ṭhapanā)」者:即安止。「观察(sallakkhaṇā)」者:即观。「还转(vivaṭṭanā)」者:即道。「遍净(pārisuddhi)」者:即果。「以及它们的回观(tesañca paṭipassanā)」者:即省察。

Tattha gaṇanāti gaṇanāyeva. Anubandhanāti anuvahanā. Phusanāti phuṭṭhaṭṭhānaṃ. Ṭhapanāti appanā. Sallakkhaṇāti vipassanā. Vivaṭṭanāti maggo. Pārisuddhīti phalaṃ. Tesañca paṭipassanāti paccavekkhaṇā.
已对照

此中,这初学的良家子应先以计数作意这业处。而计数者不应在五以下停止,不应带到十以上,中间不应显出断缺。因为在五以下停止者,心之生起在狭窄的范围中挣扎,犹如被关在狭窄牛栏里的牛群;带到十以上者,心之生起便依附于计数;中间显出断缺者,心便动摇:「我的业处是否已达顶点了呢?」因此,应避开这些过失而计数。

Tattha iminā ādikammikena kulaputtena paṭhamaṃ gaṇanāya idaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasi kātabbaṃ. Gaṇentena ca pañcannaṃ heṭṭhā na ṭhapetabbaṃ. Dasannaṃ upari na netabbaṃ. Antarā khaṇḍaṃ na dassetabbaṃ. Pañcannaṃ heṭṭhā ṭhapentassa hi sambādhe okāse cittuppādo vipphandati sambādhe vaje sanniruddhagogaṇo viya. Dasannampi upari nentassa gaṇananissitako cittuppādo hoti. Antarā khaṇḍaṃ dassentassa ‘‘sikhāppattaṃ nu kho me kammaṭṭhānaṃ, no’’ti cittaṃ vikampati. Tasmā ete dose vajjetvā gaṇetabbaṃ.
缅 1.271已对照

而计数者应先以慢数、[即]量谷者的计数来计数。因为量谷者把量筒装满后,说「一」便倒出;再装时,见到一些杂物,一边把它扔掉,一边说「一、一」。于「二、二」等也是这个方式。同样,这[修行者]也应取入出息中现起的那一个,从「一、一」开始,直到「十、十」,一一察知正在转起的[入出息]而计数。他这样计数时,出去与进来的入出息便变得明显。

Gaṇentena ca paṭhamaṃ dandhagaṇanāya dhaññamāpakagaṇanāya gaṇetabbaṃ. Dhaññamāpako hi nāḷiṃ pūretvā ‘‘eka’’nti vatvā okirati. Puna pūrento kiñci kacavaraṃ disvā taṃ chaḍḍento ‘‘ekaṃ eka’’nti vadati. Esa nayo dve dvetiādīsu. Evameva imināpi assāsapassāsesu yo upaṭṭhāti, taṃ gahetvā ‘‘ekaṃ eka’’nti ādiṃ katvā yāva ‘‘dasa dasā’’ti pavattamānaṃ pavattamānaṃ upalakkhetvāva gaṇetabbaṃ. Tassa evaṃ gaṇayato nikkhamantā ca pavisantā ca assāsapassāsā pākaṭā honti.
已对照

然后他应舍弃那慢数、[即]量谷者的计数,而以快数、[即]牧牛者的计数来计数。因为熟练的牧牛者把小石子等兜在衣襟里,手持绳与杖,一早前往牛栏,拍打母牛的背,坐在门闩柱的顶上,对一一到达门口的母牛,掷出小石子而数「一、二」。在狭窄处辛苦地过了三更之夜的牛群,一边出来,一边彼此摩擦,一阵阵急速地成群成群出来;他便一阵阵急速地数「三、四、五、十」。同样,这[修行者]依前述的方式计数时,入出息变得明显,快快地一再来回。于是他知道「[它们]一再来回」,不在内也不在外取,只取一一到达门口的,快快地计数:「一、二、三、四、五、六;一、二、三、四、五、六、七……乃至……八、九、十。」因为在与计数相系的业处中,心正是以计数之力而成为一境的,犹如在急流中依篙的支撑而稳住船。

Athānena taṃ dandhagaṇanaṃ dhaññamāpakagaṇanaṃ pahāya sīghagaṇanāya gopālakagaṇanāya gaṇetabbaṃ. Cheko hi gopālako sakkharādayo ucchaṅgena gahetvā rajjudaṇḍahattho pātova vajaṃ gantvā gāvo piṭṭhiyaṃ paharitvā palighatthambhamatthake nisinno dvārappattaṃ dvārappattaṃyeva gāviṃ ekā dveti sakkharaṃ khipitvā gaṇeti. Tiyāmarattiṃ sambādhe okāse dukkhaṃ vutthagogaṇo nikkhamanto nikkhamanto aññamaññaṃ upanighaṃsanto vegena vegena puñjapuñjo hutvā nikkhamati. So vegena vegena ‘‘tīṇi cattāri pañca dasā’’ti gaṇetiyeva, evamimassāpi purimanayena gaṇayato assāsapassāsā pākaṭā hutvā sīghaṃ sīghaṃ punappunaṃ sañcaranti. Tatonena ‘‘punappunaṃ sañcarantī’’ti ñatvā anto ca bahi ca agahetvā dvārappattaṃ dvārappattaṃyeva gahetvā ‘‘eko dve tīṇi cattāri pañca cha. Eko dve tīṇi cattāri pañca cha satta…pe… aṭṭha, nava, dasā’’ti sīghaṃ sīyaṃ gaṇetabbameva. Gaṇanapaṭibaddhe hi kammaṭṭhāne gaṇanabaleneva cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hoti, arittupatthambhanavasena caṇḍasote nāvāṭṭhapanamiva.
已对照

他这样快快地计数时,业处便像不断地转起一般而现起。于是他知道「[它]不断地转起」,不在内也不在外把握风,仍依前述的方式一阵阵急速地计数。因为随着进入里面的风而把心带进去者,里面就好像被风冲击、被脂肪充满一般;随着出到外面的风而把心带出去者,心便散乱于外面种种的所缘。而唯有把念安置在一一所触之处而修习者,修习才得成就。因此说:「不在内也不在外把握风,仍依前述的方式一阵阵急速地计数。」

Tassevaṃ sīghaṃ sīghaṃ gaṇayato kammaṭṭhānaṃ nirantaraṃ pavattaṃ viya hutvā upaṭṭhāti. Atha nirantaraṃ pavattatīti ñatvā anto ca bahi ca vātaṃ apariggahetvā purimanayeneva vegena vegena gaṇetabbaṃ. Anto pavisanavātena hi saddhiṃ cittaṃ pavesayato abbhantaraṃ vātabbhāhataṃ medapūritaṃ viya hoti. Bahi nikkhamanavātena saddhiṃ cittaṃ nīharato bahiddhā puthuttārammaṇe cittaṃ vikkhipati. Phuṭṭhaphuṭṭhokāse pana satiṃ ṭhapetvā bhāventasseva bhāvanā sampajjati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘anto ca bahi ca vātaṃ apariggahetvā purimanayeneva vegena vegena gaṇetabba’’nti.
已对照

然而这应计数多久呢?直到不用计数,念也安住于入出息所缘为止。因为计数正是为了截断向外散逸的寻,而令念安住于入出息所缘。

Kīvaciraṃ panetaṃ gaṇetabbanti? Yāva vinā gaṇanāya assāsapassāsārammaṇe sati santiṭṭhati. Bahivisaṭavitakkavicchedaṃ katvā assāsapassāsārammaṇe satisaṇṭhāpanatthaṃyeva hi gaṇanāti.
224缅 1.272已对照

二百二十四、如是以计数作意之后,应以随逐作意。所谓随逐,即止息计数,以念不断地随行入出息。而那并不是依随行初、中、后的方式。因为向外出去的风,以脐为初,以心脏为中,以鼻端为后;向内进入的风,以鼻端为初,以心脏为中,以脐为后。而随行那[初、中、后]者,散乱的心便导致躁动与动摇。即如所说——

224. Evaṃ gaṇanāya manasi katvā anubandhanāya manasi kātabbaṃ. Anubandhanā nāma gaṇanaṃ paṭisaṃharitvā satiyā nirantaraṃ assāsapassāsānaṃ anugamanaṃ. Tañca kho na ādimajjhapariyosānānugamanavasena. Bahinikkhamanavātassa hi nābhi ādi, hadayaṃ majjhaṃ, nāsikaggaṃ pariyosānaṃ. Abbhantaraṃ pavisanavātassa nāsikaggaṃ ādi, hadayaṃ majjhaṃ nābhi pariyosānaṃ. Tañcassa anugacchato vikkhepagataṃ cittaṃ sāraddhāya ceva hoti iñjanāya ca. Yathāha –
已对照

「以念随行入息的初、中、后者,由于以向内散乱的心,身与心都躁动、动摇、颤动;以念随行出息的初、中、后者,由于以向外散乱的心,身与心都躁动、动摇、颤动。」(《无碍解道》1.157)

‘‘Assāsādimajjhapariyosānaṃ satiyā anugacchato ajjhattaṃ vikkhepagatena cittena kāyopi cittampi sāraddhā ca honti iñjitā ca phanditā ca. Passāsādimajjhapariyosānaṃ satiyā anugacchato bahiddhā vikkhepagatena cittena kāyopi cittampi sāraddhā ca honti iñjitā ca phanditā cā’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.157).
已对照

因此,以随逐作意者,不应依初、中、后而作意,而应依触与安置而作意。因为不像依计数与随逐那样,另有依触与安置的作意。而就在一一所触之处计数者,是以计数与触作意;就在那里止息计数,以念随逐那些[入出息],并依安止而安置心者,称为以随逐、触与安置作意。这义应依诸义注中所说的跛子喻与守门人喻,以及《无碍解道》中所说的锯喻而知。

Tasmā anubandhanāya manasikarontena ādimajjhapariyosānavasena na manasi kātabbaṃ. Apica kho phusanāvasena ca ṭhapanāvasena ca manasi kātabbaṃ. Gaṇanānubandhanāvasena viya hi phusanāṭhapanāvasena visuṃ manasikāro natthi. Phuṭṭhaphuṭṭhaṭṭhāneyeva pana gaṇento gaṇanāya ca phusanāya ca manasi karoti. Tattheva gaṇanaṃ paṭisaṃharitvā te satiyā anubandhanto, appanāvasena ca cittaṃ ṭhapento anubandhanāya ca phusanāya ca ṭhapanāya ca manasi karotīti vuccati. Svāyamattho aṭṭhakathāsu vuttapaṅguḷadovārikūpamāhi paṭisambhidāyaṃ vuttakakacūpamāya ca veditabbo.
225已对照

二百二十五、此中,这是跛子喻——犹如跛子为在秋千上嬉戏的母子推动秋千之后,就坐在秋千柱的脚下,看见依次来、去的秋千板的两端与中间,却不为看两端与中间而忙碌;同样,这位比丘依念站在系缚柱的脚下,推动入出息的秋千,就在那相上以念坐着,以念随行依次来、去的入出息在所触之处的初、中、后,并把心安置在那里而看见,却不为看它们而忙碌——这是跛子喻。

225. Tatrāyaṃ paṅguḷopamā – seyyathāpi paṅguḷo dolāya kīḷataṃ mātāputtānaṃ dolaṃ khipitvā tattheva dolāthambhamūle nisinno kamena āgacchantassa ca gacchantassa ca dolāphalakassa ubho koṭiyo majjhañca passati, na ca ubhokoṭimajjhānaṃ dassanatthaṃ byāvaṭo hoti, evamevāyaṃ bhikkhu sativasena upanibandhanathambhamūle ṭhatvā assāsapassāsadolaṃ khipitvā tattheva nimitte satiyā nisīdanto kamena āgacchantānañca gacchantānañca phuṭṭhaṭṭhāne assāsapassāsānaṃ ādimajjhapariyosānaṃ satiyā anugacchanto tattha ca cittaṃ ṭhapento passati, na ca tesaṃ dassanatthaṃ byāvaṭo hoti, ayaṃ paṅguḷopamā.
226缅 1.273已对照

二百二十六、而这是守门人喻——犹如守门人不审查城内与城外的人:「你是谁?从哪里来?要去哪里?你手中是什么?」因为他们不是他的责任;他只审查一一到达门口的。同样,进入里面的风与出到外面的风都不是这位比丘的责任,只有一一到达门口的才是[他的]责任——这是守门人喻。

226. Ayaṃ pana dovārikūpamā – seyyathāpi dovāriko nagarassa anto ca bahi ca purise ‘‘ko tvaṃ, kuto vā āgato, kuhiṃ vā gacchasi, kiṃ vā te hatthe’’ti na vīmaṃsati. Na hi tassa te bhārā, dvārappattaṃ dvārappattaṃyeva pana vīmaṃsati, evameva imassa bhikkhuno antopaviṭṭhavātā ca bahinikkhantavātā ca na bhārā honti, dvārappattā dvārappattāyeva bhārāti ayaṃ dovārikūpamā.
227已对照

二百二十七、而锯喻应从开头如是了知。因为这已被说过——

227. Kakacūpamā pana ādito paṭṭhāya evaṃ veditabbā. Vuttañhetaṃ –
已对照

「相、入息、出息,不是一心的所缘;

‘‘Nimittaṃ assāsapassāsā, anārammaṇamekacittassa;
已对照

而不知这三法者,修习不可得。

Ajānato ca tayo dhamme, bhāvanā nupalabbhati.
已对照

「相、入息、出息,不是一心的所缘;

‘‘Nimittaṃ assāsapassāsā, anārammaṇamekacittassa;
已对照

而知这三法者,修习便可得。」(《无碍解道》1.159)

Jānato ca tayo dhamme, bhāvanā upalabbhatī’’ti. (paṭi. ma. 1.159);
已对照

「这三法如何不是一心的所缘,而这三法又并非不被知,心也不趣向散乱,勤得以显现,[他]成就加行,证得殊胜呢?犹如一棵树放在平坦的地面上,有人用锯锯它。那人的念依接触树的锯齿而现起,他不作意来或去的锯齿,然而来或去的锯齿并非不被知,勤得以显现,[他]成就加行,证得殊胜。

‘‘Kathaṃ ime tayo dhammā ekacittassa ārammaṇā na honti, na cime tayo dhammā aviditā honti, na ca cittaṃ vikkhepaṃ gacchati, padhānañca paññāyati, payogañca sādheti, visesamadhi gacchati? Seyyathāpi rukkho same bhūmibhāge nikkhitto, tamenaṃ puriso kakacena chindeyya. Rukkhe phuṭṭhakakacadantānaṃ vasena purisassa sati upaṭṭhitā hoti, na āgate vā gate vā kakacadante manasi karoti, na āgatā vā gatā vā kakacadantā aviditā honti, padhānañca paññāyati, payogañca sādheti, visesamadhigacchati.
缅 1.274已对照

「如树放在平坦的地面上,系缚相也是如此;如锯齿,入出息也是如此;如那人的念依接触树的锯齿而现起,他不作意来或去的锯齿,然而来或去的锯齿并非不被知,勤得以显现,[他]成就加行,证得殊胜;同样,比丘令念现起于鼻端或口相(mukhanimitta)而坐,他不作意来或去的入出息,然而来或去的入出息并非不被知,勤得以显现,[他]成就加行,证得殊胜。

‘‘Yathā rukkho same bhūmibhāge nikkhitto, evaṃ upanibandhanānimittaṃ. Yathā kakacadantā, evaṃ assāsapassāsā. Yathā rukkhe phuṭṭhakakacadantānaṃ vasena purisassa sati upaṭṭhitā hoti, na āgate vā gate vā kakacadante manasi karoti, na āgatā vā gatā vā kakacadantā aviditā honti, padhānañca paññāyati, payogañca sādheti, visesamadhigacchati, evameva bhikkhu nāsikagge vā mukhanimitte vā satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvā nisinno hoti, na āgate vā gate vā assāsapassāse manasi karoti, na ca āgatā vā gatā vā assāsapassāsā aviditā honti, padhānañca paññāyati, payogañca sādheti, visesamadhigacchati.
已对照

「『勤』者:什么是勤?发起精进者的身与心都适业——这是勤。什么是加行?发起精进者的诸随烦恼被舍断,诸寻平息——这是加行。什么是殊胜?发起精进者的诸结被舍断,诸随眠终尽——这是殊胜。如是,这三法不是一心的所缘,而这三法又并非不被知,心也不趣向散乱,勤得以显现,[他]成就加行,证得殊胜(《无碍解道》1.159)。

‘‘Padhānanti katamaṃ padhānaṃ? Āraddhavīriyassa kāyopi cittampi kammaniyaṃ hoti, idaṃ padhānaṃ. Katamo payogo? Āraddhavīriyassa upakkilesā pahīyanti, vitakkā vūpasamanti, ayaṃ payogo. Katamo viseso? Āraddhavīriyassa saṃyojanā pahīyanti, anusayā byantī honti, ayaṃ viseso. Evaṃ ime tayo dhammā ekacittassa ārammaṇā na honti, na cime tayo dhammā aviditā honti, na ca cittaṃ vikkhepaṃ gacchati, padhānañca paññāyati, payogañca sādheti, visesamadhigacchati (paṭi. ma. 1.159).
已对照

「谁的入出息念圆满、善修习,

‘‘Ānāpānassati yassa, paripuṇṇā subhāvitā;
已对照

依次积习,如佛陀所教示;

Anupubbaṃ paricitā, yathā buddhena desitā;
已对照

他照耀这世间,犹如脱离云层的月亮。」(《无碍解道》1.160)

So imaṃ lokaṃ pabhāseti, abbhā muttova candimā’’ti. (paṭi. ma. 1.160);
已对照

这是锯喻。而此处,应知它的用处唯在于不依来去而作意。

Ayaṃ kakacūpamā. Idha panassa āgatāgatavasena amanasikāramattameva payojananti veditabbaṃ.
228已对照

二百二十八、作意这业处时,有些人不久便生起相,并成就以其余禅支所庄严的、称为安止的安置。而有些人,从唯以计数作意之时起,依粗的入出息次第灭,身的躁扰平息时,身与心都变得轻快,身体好像达到了跃向空中的样子。犹如身躁动者坐在床上或椅上时,床椅下陷、嘎吱作响,铺盖起皱;而身不躁动者坐下时,床椅既不下陷,也不作响,铺盖也不起皱,床椅就像塞满了木棉絮一般。为什么呢?因为不躁动的身是轻的。同样,从以计数作意之时起,依粗的入出息次第灭,身的躁扰平息时,身与心都变得轻快,身体好像达到了跃向空中的样子。

228. Idaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikaroto kassaci na cireneva nimittañca uppajjati, avasesajhānaṅgapaṭimaṇḍitā appanāsaṅkhātā ṭhapanā ca sampajjati. Kassaci pana gaṇanāvaseneva manasikārakālato pabhuti anukkamato oḷārikaassāsapassāsanirodhavasena kāyadarathe vūpasante kāyopi cittampi lahukaṃ hoti, sarīraṃ ākāse laṅghanākārappattaṃ viya hoti. Yathā sāraddhakāyassa mañce vā pīṭhe vā nisīdato mañcapīṭhaṃ onamati, vikūjati, paccattharaṇaṃ valiṃ gaṇhāti. Asāraddhakāyassa pana nisīdato neva mañcapīṭhaṃ onamati, na vikūjati, na paccattharaṇaṃ valiṃ gaṇhāti, tūlapicupūritaṃ viya mañcapīṭhaṃ hoti. Kasmā? Yasmā asāraddho kāyo lahuko hoti. Evameva gaṇanāvasena manasikārakālato pabhuti anukkamato oḷārikaassāsapassāsanirodhavasena kāyadarathe vūpasante kāyopi cittampi lahukaṃ hoti, sarīraṃ ākāse laṅghanākārappattaṃ viya hoti.
缅 1.275已对照

当他粗的入出息灭时,以细的入出息之相为所缘的心转起;那也灭时,[心]仍一再以比那更细、更细的相为所缘而转起。怎样呢?犹如有人以大铁棒敲击铜盘,一击便生起大声,他以粗声为所缘的心转起;粗声灭时,此后[心]以细声之相为所缘;那也灭时,[心]仍一再以比那更细、更细的声之相为所缘而转起——应知如是。这也已被说过——「犹如敲击铜器时」(《无碍解道》1.171),详说[见彼处]。

Tassa oḷārike assāsapassāse niruddhe sukhumassāsapassāsanimittārammaṇaṃ cittaṃ pavattati. Tasmimpi niruddhe aparāparaṃ tato sukhumataraṃ sukhumataraṃ nimittārammaṇaṃ pavattatiyeva. Kathaṃ? Yathā puriso mahatiyā lohasalākāya kaṃsathālaṃ ākoṭeyya, ekappahārena mahāsaddo uppajjeyya, tassa oḷārikasaddārammaṇaṃ cittaṃ pavatteyya. Niruddhe oḷārike sadde atha pacchā sukhumasaddanimittārammaṇaṃ, tasmimpi niruddhe aparāparaṃ tato sukhumataraṃ sukhumataraṃ saddanimittārammaṇaṃ pavattateva, evanti veditabbaṃ. Vuttampicetaṃ – ‘‘seyyathāpi kaṃse ākoṭite’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.171) vitthāro.
229已对照

二百二十九、因为其他业处越往上越显著,这[业处]却不是这样;而这[业处],越往上修习,就越趋于细微,甚至不再现起。而当它这样不现起时,那比丘不应从座位起来,抖抖皮片就走。那么应当做什么呢?不应想着「我去问阿阇梨」,或「现在我的业处丢了」而起来。因为打乱威仪而走的人,业处总是新而又新的。因此,应就照原来坐着,从[原来的]处所把它取回来。

229. Yathā hi aññāni kammaṭṭhānāni uparūpari vibhūtāni honti, na tathā idaṃ. Idaṃ pana uparūpari bhāventassa sukhumattaṃ gacchati, upaṭṭhānampi na upagacchati, evaṃ anupaṭṭhahante pana tasmiṃ tena bhikkhunā uṭṭhāyāsanā cammakhaṇḍaṃ papphoṭetvā na gantabbaṃ. Kiṃ kātabbaṃ? ‘‘Ācariyaṃ pucchissāmī’’ti vā, ‘‘naṭṭhaṃ dāni me kammaṭṭhāna’’nti vā na vuṭṭhātabbaṃ. Iriyāpathaṃ vikopetvā gacchato hi kammaṭṭhānaṃ navanavameva hoti. Tasmā yathānisinneneva desato āharitabbaṃ.
已对照

此中,这是取回的方法:那比丘知道业处不现起之后,应这样思量:「这所谓的入出息在哪里有,在哪里没有?在谁有,在谁没有?」这样思量时,知道「这些在母胎中没有,沉没水中者没有,同样,成为无想者、死者、入第四禅者、具足色有与无色有者、入灭尽定者都没有」之后,应这样自己督责自己:「贤者,你既不在母胎中,也没有沉没水中,没有成为无想者,没有死,没有入第四禅,没有具足色有与无色有,也没有入灭尽定。你的入出息确实是有的,只是由于慧钝而不能把握。」于是他应依平常所触[之处]安置心而转起作意。因为这些[入出息]对长鼻者触击鼻孔而转起,对短鼻者[触击]上唇。因此,他应以「[它们]触击这个处所」而安置相。正是缘于这一理由,世尊说:「诸比丘,我不说失念、不正知者有入出息念的修习。」(《中部》3.149;《相应部》5.992)

Tatrāyaṃ āharaṇūpāyo, tena hi bhikkhunā kammaṭṭhānassa anupaṭṭhānabhāvaṃ ñatvā iti paṭisañcikkhitabbaṃ, ime assāsapassāsā nāma kattha atthi, kattha natthi. Kassa vā atthi, kassa vā natthīti. Athevaṃ paṭisañcikkhatā ime antomātukucchiyaṃ natthi, udake nimuggānaṃ natthi, tathā asaññībhūtānaṃ, matānaṃ, catutthajjhānasamāpannānaṃ, rūpārūpabhavasamaṅgīnaṃ, nirodhasamāpannānanti ñatvā evaṃ attanāva attā paṭicodetabbo ‘‘nanu tvaṃ, paṇḍita, neva mātukucchigato, na udake nimuggo, na asaññībhūto, na mato, na catutthajjhānasamāpanno, na rūpārūpabhavasamaṅgī, na nirodhasamāpanno. Atthiyeva te assāsapassāsā, mandapaññatāya pana pariggahetuṃ na sakkosī’’ti. Athānena pakatiphuṭṭhavasena cittaṃ ṭhapetvā manasikāro pavattetabbo. Ime hi dīghanāsikassa nāsāpuṭaṃ ghaṭṭentā pavattanti. Rassanāsikassa uttaroṭṭhaṃ. Tasmānena imaṃ nāma ṭhānaṃ ghaṭṭentīti nimittaṃ ṭhapetabbaṃ. Imameva hi atthavasaṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ bhagavatā – ‘‘nāhaṃ, bhikkhave, muṭṭhasatissa asampajānassa ānāpānassatibhāvanaṃ vadāmī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.149; saṃ. ni. 5.992).
230缅 1.276已对照

二百三十、因为虽然任何业处都唯有具念、正知者才得成就,然而作意除此以外的[业处]者,[那业处]会[越来越]明显。而这入出息念业处是重大的,修习也是重大的,是诸佛、独觉佛、佛子这些大士的作意之地;既不是微小的,也不是微小的众生所亲近的。越是作意它,它就越寂静、越细微。因此,于此需要强有力的念与慧。

230. Kiñcāpi hi yaṃkiñci kammaṭṭhānaṃ satassa sampajānasseva sampajjati. Ito aññaṃ pana manasikarontassa pākaṭaṃ hoti. Idaṃ pana ānāpānassatikammaṭṭhānaṃ garukaṃ garukabhāvanaṃ buddhapaccekabuddhabuddhaputtānaṃ mahāpurisānaṃyeva manasikārabhūmibhūtaṃ, na ceva ittaraṃ, na ca ittarasattasamāsevitaṃ. Yathā yathā manasi karīyati, tathā tathā santañceva hoti sukhumañca. Tasmā ettha balavatī sati ca paññā ca icchitabbā.
已对照

犹如缝补细布衣时,针也需要细,穿针孔的钻比那更细;同样,在修习这犹如细布的业处时,犹如针的念,以及犹如穿针孔之钻的、与它相应的慧,都需要强有力。而具足那念与慧的比丘,不应在平常所触之处以外寻找那些入出息。

Yathā hi maṭṭhasāṭakassa tunnakaraṇakāle sūcipi sukhumā icchitabbā. Sūcipāsavedhanampi tato sukhumataraṃ, evameva maṭṭhasāṭakasadisassa imassa kammaṭṭhānassa bhāvanākāle sūcipaṭibhāgā satipi, sūcipāsavedhanapaṭibhāgā taṃsampayuttā paññāpi balavatī icchitabbā. Tāhi ca pana satipaññāhi samannāgatena bhikkhunā na te assāsapassāsā aññatra pakatiphuṭṭhokāsā pariyesitabbā.
已对照

又犹如农夫耕了田,解下耕牛,让它们朝向牧草,坐在树荫下休息;这时他的那些耕牛急速地进入林中。凡是熟练的农夫,想再捉住它们套上[轭],并不跟随它们的足迹在林中游走,而是拿着缰绳与刺棒,径直前往它们下水的渡口,坐下或躺下;于是那些牛在白天吃草之后,下到渡口,洗浴、饮水,又上岸站着,他见了,便用缰绳系住,用刺棒刺着牵回来,套上[轭],再做工作。同样,那比丘不应在平常所触之处以外寻找那些入出息,而应拿着念的缰绳与慧的刺棒,把心安置在平常所触之处而转起作意。因为他这样作意时,不久那些[入出息]便现起,犹如牛在下水的渡口[现身]。然后他应以念的缰绳系住,就在那个处所套上[轭],以慧的刺棒刺着,一再勤修业处。

Yathā pana kassako kasiṃ kasitvā balībadde muñcitvā gocaramukhe katvā chāyāya nisinno vissameyya, athassa te balībaddā vegena aṭaviṃ paviseyyuṃ. Yo hoti cheko kassako, so puna te gahetvā yojetukāmo na tesaṃ anupadaṃ gantvā aṭaviṃ āhiṇḍahi, atha kho rasmiñca patodañca gahetvā ujukameva tesaṃ nipātanatitthaṃ gantvā nisīdati vā nipajjati vā, atha te goṇe divasabhāgaṃ caritvā nipātanatitthaṃ otaritvā nhatvā ca pivitvā ca paccuttaritvā ṭhite disvā rasmiyā bandhitvā patodena vijjhanto ānetvā yojetvā puna kammaṃ karoti, evameva tena bhikkhunā na te assāsapassāsā aññatra pakatiphuṭṭhokāsā pariyesitabbā. Satirasmiṃ pana paññāpatodañca gahetvā pakatiphuṭṭhokāse cittaṃ ṭhapetvā manasikāro pavattetabbo. Evañhissa manasikaroto na cirasseva te upaṭṭhahanti nipātanatitthe viya goṇā. Tatonena satirasmiyā bandhitvā tasmiṃyeva ṭhāne yojetvā paññāpatodena vijjhantena punappunaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ anuyuñjitabbaṃ.
231已对照

二百三十一、他这样勤修时,不久相便现起。而这[相]并不是对一切人都一样的;有些人说:它对有些人生起乐触,如木棉絮、如棉絮、如风流一般现起。

231. Tassevamanuyuñjato na cirasseva nimittaṃ upaṭṭhāti. Taṃ panetaṃ na sabbesaṃ ekasadisaṃ hoti. Apica kho kassaci sukhasamphassaṃ uppādayamāno tūlapicu viya kappāsapicu viya vātadhārā viya ca upaṭṭhātīti ekacce āhu.
缅 1.277已对照

然而这是诸义注中的抉择:这[相]对有些人如星形、如摩尼珠、如珍珠而现起;对有些人成为粗触,如棉籽、如心材的针而现起;对有些人如长的璎珞线、如花环、如烟柱而现起;对有些人如展开的蛛丝、如云层、如莲花、如车轮、如月轮、如日轮而现起。而这就犹如众多比丘诵习一部经后坐着,当一位比丘说「这经对你们现起为怎样的呢」时,一位说:「对我,它像一条大的山中河流而现起。」另一位[说]:「对我,像一片林带。」又一位[说]:「对我,像一棵树荫清凉、枝条具足、果实累累的树。」因为对他们而言,同一部经由于想的种种不同而种种地现起。同样,同一业处由于想的种种不同而种种地现起。因为这[相]是由想所生、以想为因缘、以想为源头的。因此,应知「由于想的种种不同而种种地现起」。

Ayaṃ pana aṭṭhakathāsu vinicchayo, idañhi kassaci tārakarūpaṃ viya maṇiguḷikā viya muttāguḷikā viya ca, kassaci kharasamphassaṃ hutvā kappāsaṭṭhi viya dārusārasūci viya ca, kassaci dīghapāmaṅgasuttaṃ viya kusumadāmaṃ viya dhūmasikhā viya ca, kassaci vitthataṃ makkaṭakasuttaṃ viya valāhakapaṭalaṃ viya padumapupphaṃ viya rathacakkaṃ viya candamaṇḍalaṃ viya sūriyamaṇḍalaṃ viya ca upaṭṭhāti. Tañca panetaṃ yathā sambahulesu bhikkhūsu suttantaṃ sajjhāyitvā nisinnesu ekena bhikkhunā ‘‘tumhākaṃ kīdisaṃ hutvā idaṃ suttaṃ upaṭṭhātī’’ti vutte eko ‘‘mayhaṃ mahatī pabbateyyā nadī viya hutvā upaṭṭhātī’’ti āha. Aparo ‘‘mayhaṃ ekā vanarāji viya’’. Añño ‘‘mayhaṃ eko sītacchāyo sākhāsampanno phalabhārabharitarukkho viyā’’ti. Tesaṃ hi taṃ ekameva suttaṃ saññānānatāya nānato upaṭṭhāti. Evaṃ ekameva kammaṭṭhānaṃ saññānānatāya nānato upaṭṭhāti. Saññajañhi etaṃ saññānidānaṃ saññāpabhavaṃ. Tasmā saññānānatāya nānato upaṭṭhātīti veditabbaṃ.
已对照

而此中,以入息为所缘的心是一个,以出息为所缘的是另一个,以相为所缘的又是另一个。因为凡没有这三法者,他的业处既达不到安止,也达不到近行;而凡有这三法者,唯他的业处达到近行与安止。因为这已被说过——

Ettha ca aññameva assāsārammaṇaṃ cittaṃ, aññaṃ passāsārammaṇaṃ, aññaṃ nimittārammaṇaṃ. Yassa hi ime tayo dhammā natthi, tassa kammaṭṭhānaṃ neva appanaṃ, na upacāraṃ pāpuṇāti. Yassa pana ime tayo dhammā atthi, tasseva kammaṭṭhānaṃ upacārañca appanañca pāpuṇāti. Vuttañhetaṃ –
已对照

「相、入息、出息,不是一心的所缘;

‘‘Nimittaṃ assāsapassāsā, anārammaṇamekacittassa;
已对照

不知这三法者,修习不可得。

Ajānato tayo dhamme, bhāvanā nupalabbhati.
已对照

「相、入息、出息,不是一心的所缘;

‘‘Nimittaṃ assāsapassāsā, anārammaṇamekacittassa;
已对照

唯知这三法者,修习才可得。」(《波罗夷义注》2.165)

Jānatova tayo dhamme, bhāvanā upalabbhatī’’ti. (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.165);
232已对照

二百三十二、而相这样现起时,那比丘应前往阿阇梨之处报告:「尊者,我这里现起了这样的[相]。」而阿阇梨不应说「这是相」,也不应说「这不是相」;应说「贤友,是会这样的」,然后对他说:「你要一再作意。」因为若说「[这]是相」,他可能会陷于止息;若说「不是相」,他可能会失望而沮丧。因此,两者都不说,只应勉励他于作意。——长部诵者们暂且如是[说]。

232. Evaṃ upaṭṭhite pana nimitte tena bhikkhunā ācariyassa santikaṃ gantvā ārocetabbaṃ ‘‘mayhaṃ, bhante, evarūpaṃ nāma upaṭṭhātī’’ti. Ācariyena pana etaṃ nimittanti vā na vā nimittanti na vattabbaṃ. ‘‘Evaṃ hoti, āvuso’’ti vatvā punappunaṃ manasi karohīti vattabbo. Nimittanti hi vutte vosānaṃ āpajjeyya. Na nimittanti vutte nirāso visīdeyya. Tasmā tadubhayampi avatvā manasikāreyeva niyojetabboti. Evaṃ tāva dīghabhāṇakā.
缅 1.278已对照

而中部诵者们说:「应对他说『贤友,这是相;善士,你要对业处一再作意』。」然后他应把心就安置在相上。如是,从此以后,他的修习是依安置而[进行]的。因为这已由古师们说过——

Majjhimabhāṇakā panāhu ‘‘nimittamidaṃ, āvuso, kammaṭṭhānaṃ punappunaṃ manasi karohi sappurisāti vattabbo’’ti. Athānena nimitteyeva cittaṃ ṭhapetabbaṃ. Evamassāyaṃ ito pabhuti ṭhapanāvasena bhāvanā hoti. Vuttañhetaṃ porāṇehi –
已对照

「把心安置在相上,令种种行相消隐,

‘‘Nimitte ṭhapayaṃ cittaṃ, nānākāraṃ vibhāvayaṃ;
已对照

坚固者于入出息系缚自己的心。」(《波罗夷义注》2.165)

Dhīro assāsapassāse, sakaṃ cittaṃ nibandhatī’’ti. (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.165);
已对照

如是从相现起时起,他的诸盖便已被镇伏,诸烦恼已经沉寂,念已现起,心已以近行定而得定。这时,他既不应从颜色作意那相,也不应依[其]相(lakkhaṇa)省察[它];而应犹如刹帝利王后[守护]转轮王的胎,犹如农夫[守护]稻麦的穗胎一般,避开住处等七不适宜,亲近那七适宜,好好守护[它]。然后这样守护它之后,依一再作意使[它]达到增长、增广,应成就十种安止善巧,应结合精进的平等。他这样努力时,依地遍中所说的次第,在那相上便生起四种法与五种法的诸禅。

Tassevaṃ nimittupaṭṭhānato pabhuti nīvaraṇāni vikkhambhitāneva honti, kilesā sannisinnāva. Sati upaṭṭhitāyeva. Cittaṃ upacārasamādhinā samāhitameva. Athānena taṃ nimittaṃ neva vaṇṇato manasi kātabbaṃ, na lakkhaṇato paccavekkhitabbaṃ. Apica kho khattiyamahesiyā cakkavattigabbho viya kassakena sāliyavagabbho viya ca āvāsādīni satta asappāyāni vajjetvā tāneva satta sappāyāni sevantena sādhukaṃ rakkhitabbaṃ. Atha naṃ evaṃ rakkhitvā punappunaṃ manasikāravasena vuddhiṃ virūḷhiṃ gamayitvā dasavidhaṃ appanākosallaṃ sampādetabbaṃ, vīriyasamatā yojetabbā. Tassevaṃ ghaṭentassa pathavīkasiṇe vuttānukkameneva tasmiṃ nimitte catukkapañcakajjhānāni nibbattanti.
233已对照

二百三十三、而于此[身随观]中,已生起四种法与五种法之禅的比丘,想要依观察与还转增长业处而达到遍净,便把那禅以五种行相令得自在、令纯熟,辨定名色,建立观。怎样呢?他从等至出起之后,见到入出息的集起是所生身(karajakāya)与心。因为犹如铁匠的风箱鼓动时,依皮囊与人相应的努力而有风流动;同样,依身与心而有入出息。然后,他把入出息与身辨定为「色」,把心与相应诸法辨定为「非色」。这是此中的略说;而名色差别的详说,将在后文显明。

233. Evaṃ nibbattacatukkapañcakajjhāno panettha bhikkhu sallakkhaṇāvivaṭṭanāvasena kammaṭṭhānaṃ vaḍḍhetvā pārisuddhiṃ pattukāmo tadeva jhānaṃ pañcahākārehi vasippattaṃ paguṇaṃ katvā nāmarūpaṃ vavatthapetvā vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapeti. Kathaṃ? So hi samāpattito vuṭṭhāya assāsapassāsānaṃ samudayo karajakāyo ca cittañcāti passati. Yathā hi kammāragaggariyā dhamamānāya bhastañca purisassa ca tajjaṃ vāyāmaṃ paṭicca vāto sañcarati, evameva kāyañca cittañca paṭicca assāsapassāsāti. Tato assāsapassāse ca kāyañca rūpanti cittañca taṃsampayuttadhamme ca arūpanti vavatthapeti. Ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthārato pana nāmarūpavavatthānaṃ parato āvibhavissati.
缅 1.279已对照

如是辨定名色之后,他寻求它的缘;寻求时见到它,便于三时中关于名色的转起而度疑。已度疑者,依聚思择安立三相,舍断在生灭随观的前分所生起的光明等十种观的随烦恼,辨定「离随烦恼的行道智是道」,舍弃生,达到坏灭随观;由于不断的坏灭随观,对显现为灭去的一切行厌离、离贪、解脱,依次第证得四圣道,住立于阿罗汉果,到达十九种省察智的终极,成为连同诸天的世间之最上的应奉施者。

Evaṃ nāmarūpaṃ vavatthapetvā tassa paccayaṃ pariyesati. Pariyesanto ca naṃ disvā tīsupi addhāsu nāmarūpassa pavattiṃ ārabbha kaṅkhaṃ vitarati. Vitiṇṇakaṅkho kalāpasammasanavasena tilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā udayabbayānupassanāya pubbabhāge uppanne obhāsādayo dasa vipassanupakkilese pahāya upakkilesavimuttaṃ paṭipadāñāṇaṃ maggoti vavatthapetvā udayaṃ pahāya bhaṅgānupassanaṃ patvā nirantaraṃ bhaṅgānupassanena vayato upaṭṭhitesu sabbasaṅkhāresu nibbindanto virajjanto vimuccanto yathākkamena cattāro ariyamagge pāpuṇitvā arahattaphale patiṭṭhāya ekūnavīsatibhedassa paccavekkhaṇāñāṇassa pariyantaṃ patto sadevakassa lokassa aggadakkhiṇeyyo hoti.
已对照

至此,他从计数开始、以观为终点的入出息念定的修习便圆满了——这是从一切行相而作的第一四法组的释义。

Ettāvatā cassa gaṇanaṃ ādiṃ katvā vipassanāpariyosānā ānāpānassatisamādhibhāvanā samattā hotīti ayaṃ sabbākārato paṭhamacatukkavaṇṇanā.
234已对照

二百三十四、而于其余三个四法组中,由于没有另外的业处修习之法,因此,它们的义应只依逐句释义的方法如是了知。

234. Itaresu pana tīsu catukkesu yasmā visuṃ kammaṭṭhānabhāvanānayo nāma natthi. Tasmā anupadavaṇṇanānayeneva tesaṃ evaṃ attho veditabbo.
已对照

「觉知喜(pītipaṭisaṃvedī)」者:即他学:「我将使喜被觉知、使[喜]明显而入息、出息。」此中,以两种行相,喜被觉知:依所缘,及依无痴。

Pītipaṭisaṃvedīti pītiṃ paṭisaṃviditaṃ karonto pākaṭaṃ karonto assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhati. Tattha dvīhākārehi pīti paṭisaṃviditā hoti ārammaṇato ca asammohato ca.
已对照

如何依所缘而喜被觉知?他入有喜的两种禅;在入定的刹那,由于获得禅,喜依所缘而为他所觉知,因为所缘已被觉知。如何依无痴?入有喜的两种禅,出[定]之后,对与禅相应的喜依尽、依灭去而思择;在观的刹那,由于通达相,喜依无痴而为他所觉知。因为这已在《无碍解道》中说过(《无碍解道》1.172)——

Kathaṃ ārammaṇato pīti paṭisaṃviditā hoti? Sappītike dve jhāne samāpajjati. Tassa samāpattikkhaṇe jhānapaṭilābhena ārammaṇato pīti paṭisaṃviditā hoti, ārammaṇassa paṭisaṃviditattā. Kathaṃ asammohato? Sappītike dve jhāne samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya jhānasampayuttaṃ pītiṃ khayato vayato sammasati. Tassa vipassanākkhaṇe lakkhaṇapaṭivedhena asammohato pīti paṭisaṃviditā hoti. Vuttañhetaṃ paṭisambhidāyaṃ (paṭi. ma. 1.172) –
缅 1.280已对照

「以长入息,了知心一境性、不散乱者,念已现起;以那念、以那智,那喜被觉知。以长出息……以短入息……以短出息……以觉知全身的入出息……以令身行止息的入出息,了知心一境性、不散乱者,念已现起;以那念、以那智,那喜被觉知。转向者,那喜被觉知;知者、见者、省察者、决意心者、以信胜解者、策励精进者、令念现起者、令心得定者、以慧了知者,[证知]应证知的、[遍知]应遍知的、[舍断]应舍断的、[修习]应修习的、作证应作证的[法]者,那喜被觉知。如是,那喜被觉知。」

‘‘Dīghaṃ assāsavasena cittassa ekaggataṃ avikkhepaṃ pajānato sati upaṭṭhitā hoti. Tāya satiyā tena ñāṇena sā pīti paṭisaṃviditā hoti. Dīghaṃ passāsavasena… rassaṃ assāsavasena… rassaṃ passāsavasena… sabbakāyapaṭisaṃvedī assāsapassāsavasena… passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ assāsapassāsavasena cittassa ekaggataṃ avikkhepaṃ pajānato sati upaṭṭhitā hoti. Tāya satiyā tena ñāṇena sā pīti paṭisaṃviditā hoti. Āvajjato sā pīti paṭisaṃviditā hoti. Jānato passato paccavekkhato cittaṃ adhiṭṭhahato saddhāya adhimuccato vīriyaṃ paggaṇhato satiṃ upaṭṭhāpayato cittaṃ samādahato paññāya pajānato abhiññeyyaṃ pariññeyyaṃ pahātabbaṃ bhāvetabbaṃ sacchikātabbaṃ sacchikaroto sā pīti paṭisaṃviditā hoti. Evaṃ sā pīti paṭisaṃviditā hotī’’ti.
已对照

依这同一方式,其余诸句也应依义而知。而此中只有这一点差别:应知觉知乐是依三种禅,觉知心行是依全部四种[禅]。「心行(cittasaṅkhāro)」者:即受等两蕴。又此中于「觉知乐」一句,为显示观之地,在《无碍解道》(《无碍解道》1.173)中说了「『乐』者:两种乐,即身的乐与心的乐」。「令心行止息(passambhayaṃ cittasaṅkhāraṃ)」者:即令一一粗的心行止息、令[它]灭,此是其义。它应依身行中所说的方式详细地了知。

Eteneva nayena avasesapadānipi atthato veditabbāni. Idampanettha visesamattaṃ, tiṇṇaṃ jhānānaṃ vasena sukhapaṭisaṃveditā, catunnampi vasena cittasaṅkhārapaṭisaṃveditā veditabbā. Cittasaṅkhāroti vedanādayo dve khandhā. Sukhapaṭisaṃvedīpade cettha vipassanābhūmidassanatthaṃ ‘‘sukhanti dve sukhāni kāyikañca sukhaṃ cetasikañcā’’ti paṭisambhidāyaṃ (paṭi. ma. 1.173) vuttaṃ. Passambhayaṃ cittasaṅkhāranti oḷārikaṃ oḷārikaṃ cittasaṅkhāraṃ passambhento, nirodhentoti attho. So vitthārato kāyasaṅkhāre vuttanayeneva veditabbo.
已对照

此外,此中于喜句,以喜为标目而说受;于乐句,则以自身之形[说]受。在心行两句中,依「想与受是心所,这些法系属于心,是心行」(《无碍解道》1.174;《中部》1.463)之语,[说的是]与想相应的受。如是,应知这四法组是依受随观的方式而说的。

Apicettha pītipade pītisīsena vedanā vuttā. Sukhapade sarūpeneva vedanā. Dvīsu cittasaṅkhārapadesu ‘‘saññā ca vedanā ca cetasikā ete dhammā cittapaṭibaddhā cittasaṅkhārā’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.174; ma. ni. 1.463) vacanato saññāsampayuttā vedanāti evaṃ vedanānupassanānayena idaṃ catukkaṃ bhāsitanti veditabbaṃ.
235已对照

二百三十五、于第三四法组中,也应知觉知心是依四种禅。「令心喜悦(abhippamodayaṃ cittaṃ)」者:即他学:「我将令心欢喜、愉悦、欢笑、大笑而入息、出息。」此中,以两种行相而有喜悦:依定,及依观。

235. Tatiyacatukkepi catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ vasena cittapaṭisaṃveditā veditabbā. Abhippamodayaṃ cittanti cittaṃ modento pamodento hāsento pahāsento assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhati. Tattha dvīhākārehi abhippamodo hoti samādhivasena ca vipassanāvasena ca.
缅 1.281已对照

如何依定?他入有喜的两种禅;他在入定的刹那,以相应的喜令心欢喜、令[心]愉悦。如何依观?入有喜的两种禅,出[定]之后,对与禅相应的喜依尽、依灭去而思择;如是,在观的刹那,以与禅相应的喜为所缘,令心欢喜、令[心]愉悦。如是行道者,称为「他学:『我将令心喜悦而入息、出息。』」

Kathaṃ samādhivasena? Sappītike dve jhāne samāpajjati. So samāpattikkhaṇe sampayuttapītiyā cittaṃ āmodeti pamodeti. Kathaṃ vipassanāvasena? Sappītike dve jhāne samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya jhānasampayuttapītiṃ khayato vayato sammasati. Evaṃ vipassanākkhaṇe jhānasampayuttaṃ pītiṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā cittaṃ āmodeti pamodeti. Evaṃ paṭipanno ‘‘abhippamodayaṃ cittaṃ assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhatī’’ti vuccati.
已对照

「令心得定(samādahaṃ cittaṃ)」者:即依初禅等,把心平正地置于所缘、平正地安置。或者,入那些禅,出[定]之后,对与禅相应的心依尽、依灭去而正观者,在观的刹那,由于通达相,生起刹那心一境性。依如是生起的刹那心一境性,也把心平正地置于所缘、平正地安置者,称为「他学:『我将令心得定而入息、出息。』」

Samādahaṃ cittanti paṭhamajjhānādivasena ārammaṇe cittaṃ samaṃ ādahanto samaṃ ṭhapento. Tāni vā pana jhānāni samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya jhānasampayuttaṃ cittaṃ khayato vayato sampassato vipassanākkhaṇe lakkhaṇapaṭivedhena uppajjati khaṇikacittekaggatā. Evaṃ uppannāya khaṇikacittekaggatāya vasenapi ārammaṇe cittaṃ samaṃ ādahanto samaṃ ṭhapento ‘‘samādahaṃ cittaṃ assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhatī’’ti vuccati.
已对照

「令心解脱(vimocayaṃ cittaṃ)」者:即以初禅令心从诸盖脱出、解脱,以第二[禅]从寻、伺,以第三[禅]从喜,以第四[禅]从乐与苦令心脱出、解脱。或者,入那些禅,出[定]之后,对与禅相应的心依尽、依灭去而思择。他在观的刹那,以无常随观令心从常想脱出,以苦随观从乐想,以无我随观从我想,以厌离随观从欢喜,以离贪随观从贪,以灭随观从集起,以舍离随观从执取令心脱出,而入息、出息。因此称为「他学:『我将令心解脱而入息、出息。』」如是,应知这四法组是依心随观而说的。

Vimocayaṃ cittanti paṭhamajjhānena nīvaraṇehi cittaṃ mocento vimocento, dutiyena vitakkavicārehi, tatiyena pītiyā, catutthena sukhadukkhehi cittaṃ mocento vimocento. Tāni vā pana jhānāni samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya jhānasampayuttaṃ cittaṃ khayato vayato sammasati. So vipassanākkhaṇe aniccānupassanāya niccasaññāto cittaṃ mocento, dukkhānupassanāya sukhasaññāto, anattānupassanāya attasaññāto, nibbidānupassanāya nandito, virāgānupassanāya rāgato, nirodhānupassanāya samudayato, paṭinissaggānupassanāya ādānato cittaṃ mocento assasati ceva passasati ca. Tena vuccati ‘‘vimocayaṃ cittaṃ assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhatī’’ti. Evaṃ cittānupassanāvasena idaṃ catukkaṃ bhāsitanti veditabbaṃ.
236已对照

二百三十六、而于第四四法组中,「随观无常者(aniccānupassī)」这里,首先应知无常,应知无常性,应知无常随观,应知随观无常者。

236. Catutthacatukke pana aniccānupassīti ettha tāva aniccaṃ veditabbaṃ. Aniccatā veditabbā. Aniccānupassanā veditabbā. Aniccānupassī veditabbo.
缅 1.282已对照

此中,「无常」者:即五蕴。为什么呢?因为[它们]有生、灭去、变异。「无常性」者:即它们的生、灭去、变异;或者是有而后无;义即已生起的[诸法]不以那同一行相而住,以刹那坏灭而破坏。「无常随观」者:即依那无常性,于色等随观为「无常」。「随观无常者」,即具足那随观的人。因此,应知如是的人入息、出息时,于此处是「他学:『我将随观无常而入息、出息。』」

Tattha aniccanti pañcakkhandhā. Kasmā? Uppādavayaññathattabhāvā. Aniccatāti tesaṃyeva uppādavayaññathattaṃ, hutvā abhāvo vā, nibbattānaṃ tenevākārena aṭṭhatvā khaṇabhaṅgena bhedoti attho. Aniccānupassanāti tassā aniccatāya vasena rūpādīsu aniccanti anupassanā. Aniccānupassīti tāya anupassanāya samannāgato. Tasmā evaṃbhūto assasanto passasanto ca idha ‘‘aniccānupassī assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhatī’’ti veditabbo.
已对照

而「随观离贪者(virāgānupassī)」这里,有两种离贪:坏灭离贪与究竟离贪。此中,「坏灭离贪」者:即诸行的刹那坏灭。「究竟离贪」者:即涅槃。「离贪随观」者:即依见那两者而转起的观与道。应知具足那两种随观而入息、出息者,是「他学:『我将随观离贪而入息、出息。』」于「随观灭者(nirodhānupassī)」一句也是这个方式。

Virāgānupassīti ettha pana dve virāgā khayavirāgo ca accantavirāgo ca. Tattha khayavirāgoti saṅkhārānaṃ khaṇabhaṅgo. Accantavirāgoti nibbānaṃ. Virāgānupassanāti tadubhayadassanavasena pavattā vipassanā ca maggo ca. Tāya duvidhāyapi anupassanāya samannāgato hutvā assasanto passasanto ca ‘‘virāgānupassī assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhatī’’ti veditabbo. Nirodhānupassīpadepi eseva nayo.
已对照

「随观舍离者(paṭinissaggānupassī)」这里,也有两种舍离:舍弃舍离与跃入舍离。舍离本身即是随观,[故为]「舍离随观」;这是观与道的名称。

Paṭinissaggānupassīti etthāpi dve paṭinissaggā pariccāgapaṭinissaggo ca pakkhandanapaṭinissaggo ca. Paṭinissaggoyeva anupassanā paṭinissaggānupassanā. Vipassanāmaggānaṃ etamadhivacanaṃ.
已对照

因为观依彼分,把诸烦恼连同诸蕴与行作一起舍弃;又由于见有为的过患,以倾向于那[涅槃]而跃入与之相反的涅槃,所以称为「舍弃舍离」,也称为「跃入舍离」。道依正断,把诸烦恼连同诸蕴与行作一起舍弃;又以[涅槃]为所缘而跃入涅槃,所以称为「舍弃舍离」,也称为「跃入舍离」。而两者都由于随着前前之智而一再观察,故称为「随观」。应知具足那两种舍离随观而入息、出息者,是「他学:『我将随观舍离而入息、出息。』」

Vipassanā hi tadaṅgavasena saddhiṃ khandhābhisaṅkhārehi kilese pariccajati, saṅkhatadosadassanena ca tabbiparīte nibbāne tanninnatāya pakkhandatīti pariccāgapaṭinissaggo ceva pakkhandanapaṭinissaggoti ca vuccati. Maggo samucchedavasena saddhiṃ khandhābhisaṅkhārehi kilese pariccajati, ārammaṇakaraṇena ca nibbāne pakkhandatīti pariccāgapaṭinissaggo ceva pakkhandanapaṭinissaggoti ca vuccati. Ubhayampi pana purimapurimaññāṇānaṃ anuanupassanato anupassanāti vuccati. Tāya duvidhāyapi paṭinissaggānupassanāya samannāgato hutvā assasanto passasanto ca ‘‘paṭinissaggānupassī assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhatī’’ti veditabbo.
已对照

这第四四法组唯依纯观而说;而前三[四法组]则依止与观[而说]。如是,应依四个四法组了知具十六事的入出息念的修习。又如是依十六事,这入出息念有大果、大功德。

Idaṃ catutthacatukkaṃ suddhavipassanāvaseneva vuttaṃ. Purimāni pana tīṇi samathavipassanāvasena. Evaṃ catunnaṃ catukkānaṃ vasena soḷasavatthukāya ānāpānassatiyā bhāvanā veditabbā. Evaṃ soḷasavatthuvasena ca pana ayaṃ ānāpānassati mahapphalā hoti mahānisaṃsā.
237缅 1.283已对照

二百三十七、此中,依「诸比丘,这入出息念定也[是这样]:若修习、多作,正是寂静的、殊胜的」等语,应知它也依寂静性等而有大功德,也依能断除寻而[有大功德]。因为由于是寂静、殊胜、无浇灌的乐住,它截断心依那些作定之障碍的寻而此处彼处的奔驰,使心唯朝向入出息所缘。正因此而说:「为了断除寻,应修习入出息念。」(《增支部》9.1)

237. Tatrassa ‘‘ayampi kho, bhikkhave, ānāpānassatisamādhi bhāvito bahulīkato santo ceva paṇīto cā’’tiādivacanato santabhāvādivasenāpi mahānisaṃsatā veditabbā, vitakkupacchedasamatthatāyapi. Ayañhi santapaṇītaasecanakasukhavihārattā samādhiantarāyakarānaṃ vitakkānaṃ vasena ito cito ca cittassa vidhāvanaṃ vicchinditvā ānāpānārammaṇābhimukhameva cittaṃ karoti. Teneva vuttaṃ ‘‘ānāpānassati bhāvetabbā vitakkupacchedāyā’’ti (a. ni. 9.1).
已对照

又应知它也依作为明与解脱之圆满的根本而有大功德。因为这已由世尊说过:「诸比丘,入出息念若修习、多作,能圆满四念处;四念处若修习、多作,能圆满七觉支;七觉支若修习、多作,能圆满明与解脱。」(《中部》3.147)

Vijjāvimuttipāripūriyā mūlabhāvenāpi cassā mahānisaṃsatā veditabbā. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā – ‘‘ānāpānassati, bhikkhave, bhāvitā bahulīkatā cattāro satipaṭṭhāne paripūreti, cattāro satipaṭṭhānā bhāvitā bahulīkatā satta bojjhaṅge paripūrenti, satta bojjhaṅgā bhāvitā bahulīkatā vijjāvimuttiṃ paripūrentī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.147).
已对照

此外,应知它也依令最后的入出息被知而有大功德。因为这已由世尊说过:「罗睺罗,入出息念如是修习、如是多作时,即使是那些最后的入出息,也是被知而灭,不是不被知[而灭]。」(《中部》2.121)

Apica carimakānaṃ assāsapassāsānaṃ viditabhāvakaraṇatopissā mahānisaṃsatā veditabbā. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā – ‘‘evaṃ bhāvitāya kho, rāhula, ānāpānassatiyā evaṃ bahulīkatāya yepi te carimakā assāsapassāsā, tepi viditāva nirujjhanti, no aviditā’’ti (ma. ni. 2.121).
238缅 1.284已对照

二百三十八、此中,依灭而言,有三种最后的[入出息]:有最后的、禅最后的、死最后的。因为在诸有之中,入出息在欲有中转起,在色有、无色有中不转起,所以它们是有最后的。在诸禅之中,在前三禅中转起,在第四[禅]中不转起,所以它们是禅最后的。而那些与死心之前的第十六心一同生起、与死心一同灭的,这些名为死最后的。此处以「最后的」所意指的,就是这些。

相传,勤修这业处的比丘,由于善于把握入出息所缘,在死心之前第十六心的生起刹那转向生时,它们的生也明显;转向住时,它们的住也明显;转向坏时,它们的坏也明显。

因为修习这以外的其他业处而证得阿罗汉的比丘,其寿命的期限或已限定,或未限定;而修习这具十六事的入出息念而证得阿罗汉者,寿命的期限必已限定。他知道「现在我的寿行将转起这么久,不会超过这个」,便随自己的本意,做完照料身体、穿[下衣]、披[上衣]等一切事务,然后闭上眼睛——犹如住拘吒山寺的帝须长老(Koṭapabbatavihāravāsī Tissatthera)、住大迦兰吉耶寺的大帝须长老(Mahākarañjiyavihāravāsī Mahātissatthera)、住天子大国的常乞食帝须长老(Devaputtamahāraṭṭha Piṇḍapātikatissatthera),以及住质多罗山寺的两兄弟长老(Cittalapabbatavihāravāsino dve Bhātiyattherā)那样。

此中[以]一则故事来阐明。相传,两兄弟长老中的一位,在满月布萨日诵毕波罗提木叉之后,由比丘僧团围绕着前往自己的住处,站在经行处望着月光,考量自己的寿行之后,对比丘僧团说:「你们从前见过比丘是怎样般涅槃的?」其中有些人说:「我们从前见过就坐在座位上般涅槃的。」有些人[说]:「我们[见过]在空中结跏趺而坐的。」长老说:「现在我要让你们看看我就在经行中般涅槃。」于是在经行处画了一条线,说:「我从这经行处的一端走到另一端,回来时一到这条线就般涅槃。」说完,下到经行处,走到另一端,回来时,就在一只脚踏上那条线的刹那般涅槃了。

因此,智者确应不放逸地

常常勤修这样有众多功德利益的入出息念。

这是关于入出息念的详说之门。

238. Tattha nirodhavasena tayo carimakā bhavacarimakā, jhānacarimakā, cuticarimakāti. Bhavesu hi kāmabhave assāsapassāsā pavattanti, rūpārūpabhavesu nappavattanti, tasmā te bhavacarimakā. Jhānesu purime jhānattaye pavattanti, catutthe nappavattanti, tasmā te jhānacarimakā. Ye pana cuticittassa purato soḷasamena cittena saddhiṃ uppajjitvā cuticittena saha nirujjhanti, ime cuticarimakā nāma. Ime idha ‘‘carimakā’’ti adhippetā.
Imaṃ kira kammaṭṭhānaṃ anuyuttassa bhikkhuno ānāpānārammaṇassa suṭṭhu pariggahitattā cuticittassa purato soḷasamassa cittassa uppādakkhaṇe uppādaṃ āvajjayato uppādopi nesaṃ pākaṭo hoti. Ṭhitiṃ āvajjayato ṭhitipi nesaṃ pākaṭā hoti. Bhaṅgaṃ āvajjayato ca bhaṅgo nesaṃ pākaṭo hoti.
Ito aññaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ bhāvetvā arahattaṃ pattassa bhikkhuno hi āyuantaraṃ paricchinnaṃ vā hoti aparicchinnaṃ vā. Idaṃ pana soḷasavatthukaṃ ānāpānassatiṃ bhāvetvā arahattaṃ pattassa āyuantaraṃ paricchinnameva hoti. So ‘‘ettakaṃ dāni me āyusaṅkhārā pavattissanti, na ito para’’nti ñatvā attano dhammatāya eva sarīrapaṭijaggananivāsanapārupanādīni sabbakiccāni katvā akkhīni nimīleti koṭapabbatavihāravāsītissatthero viya mahākarañjiyavihāravāsīmahātissatthero viya devaputtamahāraṭṭhe piṇḍapātikatissatthero viya cittalapabbatavihāravāsino dve bhātiyattherā viya ca.
Tatridaṃ ekavatthuparidīpanaṃ. Dvebhātiyattherānaṃ kireko puṇṇamuposathadivase pātimokkhaṃ osāretvā bhikkhusaṅghaparivuto attano vasanaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā caṅkame ṭhito candālokaṃ oloketvā attano āyusaṅkhāre upadhāretvā bhikkhusaṅghamāha – ‘‘tumhehi kathaṃ parinibbāyantā bhikkhū diṭṭhapubbā’’ti. Tatra keci āhaṃsu ‘‘amhehi āsane nisinnakāva parinibbāyantā diṭṭhapubbā’’ti. Keci ‘‘amhehi ākāse pallaṅkamābhujitvā nisinnakā’’ti. Thero āha – ‘‘ahaṃ dāni vo caṅkamantameva parinibbāyamānaṃ dassessāmī’’ti tato caṅkame lekhaṃ katvā ‘‘ahaṃ ito caṅkamakoṭito parakoṭiṃ gantvā nivattamāno imaṃ lekhaṃ patvāva parinibbāyissāmī’’ti vatvā caṅkamaṃ oruyha parabhāgaṃ gantvā nivattamāno ekena pādena lekhaṃ akkantakkhaṇeyeva parinibbāyi.
Tasmā have appamatto, anuyuñjetha paṇḍito;
Evaṃ anekānisaṃsaṃ, ānāpānassatiṃ sadāti.
Idaṃ ānāpānassatiyaṃ vitthārakathāmukhaṃ.
已对照

寂止随念论

Upasamānussatikathā
239缅 1.285已对照

二百三十九、而想修习在入出息念之后所列出的寂止随念者,应独处静坐,[思惟]「诸比丘,凡有为或无为诸法,离贪被称为其中最上的,即:憍之破除、渴之调伏、执着之根除、轮转之断绝、渴爱之尽、离贪、灭、涅槃」(《增支部》4.34;《如是语》90),如是随念称为一切苦之寂止的涅槃的诸功德。

此中,「凡(yāvatā)」者:即有多少。「诸法(dhammā)」者:即诸自性。「有为或无为(saṅkhatā vā asaṅkhatā vā)」者:即由诸缘会集、聚合而所作的,或非所作的。「离贪被称为其中最上的(virāgo tesaṃ dhammānaṃ aggamakkhāyati)」者:即在那些有为、无为法之中,离贪被称为最上的,[即]最胜的、最高的。此中,「离贪」并非唯是贪的不存在;而是以「即:憍之破除……乃至……涅槃」[所说的]——凡获得「憍之破除」等名称的那无为法,应理解为离贪。因为缘于它,慢憍、男子憍等一切憍都成为无憍、离憍而消亡,所以称为「憍之破除(madanimmadano)」。又因为缘于它,一切欲渴都达到调伏、灭没,所以称为「渴之调伏(pipāsavinayo)」。又因为缘于它,对五欲功德的诸执着达到根除,所以称为「执着之根除(ālayasamugghāto)」。又因为缘于它,三地轮转被断绝,所以称为「轮转之断绝(vaṭṭupacchedo)」。又因为缘于它,渴爱完全趋于尽、被离贪、被灭,所以称为「渴爱之尽、离贪、灭」。又因为它出离、脱离、离系于渴爱——[渴爱]由于为了一再的存在而编织、结缚、缝缀四生、五趣、七识住与九众生居,[故]得到「织(vāna)」之称——所以称为「涅槃(nibbāna)」。

如是,应依憍之破除性等这些功德,随念称为涅槃的寂止。或者,凡世尊在「诸比丘,我要为你们说无为……真实……彼岸……极难见……不老……坚固……无妄衍……不死……吉祥……安稳……未曾有……无灾……无恼害……清净……洲……救护……诸比丘,我要为你们说庇护」等经中(《相应部》4.366)所说的其他寂止功德,也应依它们而随念。

当他这样依憍之破除性等功德随念寂止时,「那时他的心不为贪所缠缚,不为瞋……心不为痴所缠缚;那时他的心依寂止而唯是正直的」,[于是]依佛随念等中所说的方式,已镇伏诸盖者,于一刹那生起诸禅支。然而,由于寂止诸功德的甚深,或由于倾心于随念种种功德,[禅]不达到安止,唯是达到近行的禅。而这[禅]依随念寂止的功德,便得到「寂止随念」之名。

而这[随念]也如六随念一样,唯于圣弟子成就;虽然如此,重视寂止的凡夫也应作意。因为即使依听闻,心也对寂止生起净信。而勤修这寂止随念的比丘,睡得安乐,醒得安乐,诸根寂静,心意寂静,具足惭愧,令人生信,胜解于殊胜,为同梵行者所尊重、所钦敬。即使未更上通达,也以善趣为归趣。

因此,明智者确应不放逸地

修习这样有众多功德利益的、对圣寂止的念。

这是关于寂止随念的详说之门。

239. Ānāpānassatiyā anantaraṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ pana upasamānussatiṃ bhāvetukāmena rahogatena paṭisallīnena – ‘‘yāvatā, bhikkhave, dhammā saṅkhatā vā asaṅkhatā vā virāgo tesaṃ dhammānaṃ aggamakkhāyati, yadidaṃ madanimmadano pipāsavinayo ālayasamugghāto vaṭṭupacchedo taṇhakkhayo virāgo nirodho nibbāna’’nti (a. ni. 4.34; itivu. 90) evaṃ sabbadukkhūpasamasaṅkhātassa nibbānassa guṇā anussaritabbā.
Tattha yāvatāti yattakā. Dhammāti sabhāvā. Saṅkhatā vā asaṅkhatā vāti saṅgamma samāgamma paccayehi katā vā akatā vā. Virāgo tesaṃ dhammānaṃ aggamakkhāyatīti tesaṃ saṅkhatāsaṅkhatadhammānaṃ virāgo aggamakkhāyati seṭṭho uttamoti vuccati. Tattha virāgoti na rāgābhāvamattameva, atha kho yadidaṃ madanimmadano…pe… nibbānanti yo so madanimmadanotiādīni nāmāni asaṅkhatadhammo labhati, so virāgoti paccetabbo. So hi yasmā tamāgamma sabbepi mānamadapurisamadādayo madā nimmadā amadā honti vinassanti, tasmā madanimmadanoti vuccati. Yasmā ca tamāgamma sabbāpi kāmapipāsā vinayaṃ abbhatthaṃ yāti, tasmā pipāsavinayoti vuccati. Yasmā pana tamāgamma pañcakāmaguṇālayā samugghātaṃ gacchanti, tasmā ālayasamugghātoti vuccati. Yasmā ca tamāgamma tebhūmakaṃ vaṭṭaṃ upacchijjati, tasmā vaṭṭupacchedoti vuccati. Yasmā pana tamāgamma sabbaso taṇhā khayaṃ gacchati virajjati nirujjhati ca, tasmā taṇhakkhayo virāgo nirodhoti vuccati. Yasmā panesa catasso yoniyo pañca gatiyo satta viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo nava ca sattāvāse aparāparabhāvāya vinanato ābandhanato saṃsibbanato vānanti laddhavohārāya taṇhāya nikkhanto nissaṭo visaṃyutto, tasmā nibbānanti vuccatīti.
Evametesaṃ madanimmadanatādīnaṃ guṇānaṃ vasena nibbānasaṅkhāto upasamo anussaritabbo. Ye vā panaññepi bhagavatā – ‘‘asaṅkhatañca vo, bhikkhave, desessāmi… saccañca… pārañca… sududdasañca… ajarañca… dhuvañca… nippapañcañca… amatañca… sivañca… khemañca… abbhutañca… anītikañca… abyābajjhañca… visuddhiñca… dīpañca… tāṇañca … leṇañca vo, bhikkhave, desessāmī’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 4.366) suttesu upasamaguṇā vuttā, tesampi vasena anussaritabboyeva.
Tassevaṃ madanimmadanatādiguṇavasena upasamaṃ anussarato neva tasmiṃ samaye rāgapariyuṭṭhitaṃ cittaṃ hoti, na dosa… na mohapariyuṭṭhitaṃ cittaṃ hoti. Ujugatamevassa tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ hoti upasamaṃ ārabbhāti buddhānussatiādīsu vuttanayeneva vikkhambhitanīvaraṇassa ekakkhaṇe jhānaṅgāni uppajjanti. Upasamaguṇānaṃ pana gambhīratāya nānappakāraguṇānussaraṇādhimuttatāya vā appanaṃ appatvā upacārappattameva jhānaṃ hoti. Tadetamupasamaguṇānussaraṇavasena upasamānussaticceva saṅkhyaṃ gacchati.
Cha anussatiyo viya ca ayampi ariyasāvakasseva ijjhati, evaṃ santepi upasamagarukena puthujjanenāpi manasi kātabbā. Sutavasenāpi hi upasame cittaṃ pasīdati. Imañca pana upasamānussatiṃ anuyutto bhikkhu sukhaṃ supati, sukhaṃ paṭibujjhati, santindriyo hoti santamānaso hirottappasamannāgato pāsādiko paṇītādhimuttiko sabrahmacārīnaṃ garu ca bhāvanīyo ca. Uttari appaṭivijjhanto pana sugatiparāyano hoti.
Tasmā have appamatto, bhāvayetha vicakkhaṇo;
Evaṃ anekānisaṃsaṃ, ariye upasame satinti.
Idaṃ upasamānussatiyaṃ vitthārakathāmukhaṃ.
已对照

如是,在为令善人愉悦而造的《清净道论》中,

Iti sādhujanapāmojjatthāya kate visuddhimagge
已对照

于定的修习之部,

Samādhibhāvanādhikāre
已对照

名为〈随念业处的解说〉的

Anussatikammaṭṭhānaniddeso nāma
已对照

第八章[终]。

Aṭṭhamo paricchedo.